    [Personnel Classification]
    [From the U.S. Government Publishing Office, www.gpo.gov]

    ﻿tV/,35-;
    NON-CIRCULATING
    PERSONNEL
    CLASSIFICATION
    17 JUNE 1944
    WAR DEPARTMENT
    NTSU LIBRARY
    Document	"A	/j
    Reserve	kVi	//O	// I
    J Ml U(L njtLQlJ
    . WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL

    &

    TM 12-425 o 1
    1’

    TECHNICAL MANUAL
    $
    PERSONNEL CLASSIFICATION
    3

    Changes 1
    No. 1 J
    TM 12-425, 17 June 1944, is changed as follows:
    Paragraph 10a page 5, change wrord “misassignments” to “reassignments” in line 2, right-hand column.
    Paragraph 10a page 5, delete the words “Army Service Forces replacement training centers will report such men directly to The Adjutant General, and,” in line 9, right-hand column.
    Paragraph 17b page 9, change standard score referred to from “60” to “85.”
    Paragraph 36c(5) (e) page 17, delete.
    Paragraph 55/ page 25, delete words “or potential” in line 5, left-hand column.
    Paragraph 80c page 34, add at the end the sen-[AG 300.7 (30 Oct 44) ]
    By order of the Secretary of War;
    WAR DEPARTMENT
    Washington 25, D. C., 15 December 1944 tence, “No entry will be made in this item for attendance at general or special service schools.”
    Paragraph 80d page 34, delete.
    Paragraph 80e page 34, delete.
    Remove pages 11 and 12 and substitute revised page 11 and page 12 herewith.
    Remove pages 23 and 24 and substitute revised pages 23, 23A, and 24 herewith.
    Remove pages 25 and 26 and substitute page 25 and revised page 26 herewith.
    Remove pages 37 and 38 and substitute page 37 and revised pages 38 and 38A herewith.
    Remove pages 39 and 40 and substitute revised pages 39, 40, and 40A herewith.

    ?■

    S

    I
    Official:
    J. A. ULIO
    Major General
    The Adjutant General
    G. C. MARSHALL
    Chief of Staff
    Distribution :
    AAF (10) ; AGF (10); ASF (10); Dept (10) ; Tech Sv (2); Sv C (10); PC&S (1); Gen & Sp Sv Sch (5); USMA (2); ASTP (1); ASF Tng C (15); AGF Repl Tng C (15); Pers Reasgt C (10); RC (10); A (10); CHQ (10); D (5) except AAF (0); R (2)-except AAF (0); SBn (3) except AAF (0).
    For explanation of symbols, see FM 21-6.
    AGO216A 610601°—45
    U. S, GCVERWMENT PRINTING OFFICE: I54»

    &

    "y-

    NTSU LIBRARY

    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    TM 12-425
    20-21
    serves no useful purpose to permit men to draw comparisons by means of test scores.
    b. Safeguarding of Test Material. Test materials are restricted, and it is imperative that proper safeguards be maintained. To accomplish this end, cabinets or chests with adequate locking devices will be provided. Testing materials will be locked in such containers at all times when not in actual use. Frequent inventories will be made.
    c. Disposition of Excess and Useless Testing Material. (1) Whenever a unit or station has on hand damaged, wornout, or obsolete test booklets, scoring keys, answer sheets, etc., such material will be destroyed by shredding or burning at the post where it is located. A commissioned officer will witness the destruction,
    (2) Units possessing current test material in excess of their needs will report such excesses to appropriate post publication stockrooms or, if overseas, to appropriate distributing agencies, who, in turn, will report their surpluses to the Adjutant General depot serving them, for instructions as to disposition.
    21. TEST SUPPLIES.
    Test supplies, including test booklets, answer sheets, scoring keys, and manuals, will be secured from the Adjutant General depots for all tests authorized for routine use at induction stations, reception centers, special training units, replacement training centers, and WAC installations, except the following tests:
    Oral Trade Questions.
    Electricity and Radio Information Test, TK-1, X-2.
    Driver and Automotive Information Test, TK-2, X-l.
    Arithmetic Test, EA-3, X-2.
    These tests can be obtained from The Adjutant General, Classification and Replacement Branch. Army Air Forces installation tests can be obtained from the Air Surgeon.
    AGO 216A
    11
    TM 12-425
    50-55
    (3) If sufficient space is not available in this section, additional entries may be made in “Remarks.”
    51.	ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS.
    Assignment limitations entered in this item are of two general categories, namely, conscientious objectors and men on whom a physical profile serial has been accomplished.
    a.	Physical Profile Serial. Physical profile serial will be recorded and dated in this item, for example, 211211, 20 May 44, or 211211, 21 Aug. 44, etc., in accordance with existing instructions. WD AGO Form 20 completed prior to the effective date of the Physical Profile Plan, which shows physical limitations in this item, will not be changed. If a profile is subsequently accomplished for a soldier whose Form 20 already shows physical assignment limitation in nontechnical language, such physical profile serial will also be entered in this item. When deemed advisable for proper assignment or further clarification of the physical profile serial, notation may also be made in this section, in nontechnical language, of the physical limitation indicated by the physical profile serial entered. If space in this item is insufficient, reference will be made to item 28, “Remarks,” and the statement will be continued under that item.
    b.	Conscientious Objector. The term “conscientious objector” will be used for enlisted men who are so certified by local selective service boards. Certified conscientious objectors will be assigned to units and installations of the Medical Department only. A man so classified may, at any time, apply in writing to his unit commander for reassignment to a combat unit. This request will be forwarded to his regimental or similar unit commander for approval and, upon such approval, reclassification and reassignment may be accomplished in the manner prescribed by AR 615-200. All reference on his records to “conscientious objector” will, in that case, be lined out, with date and initials of the officer making the change and the original request will be forwarded, by indorsement, to The Adjutant General.
    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    52.	SD (SUSPECTED DISLOYALTY).
    No entry will be made in this item.
    53.	PREFERRED.
    No entry will be made in this item.
    54.	ASSIGNMENT RECOMMENDED RY RECEPTION CENTER.
    This entry will be made by the classifier at the reception center. The classifier will review all the items recorded by the interviewer and make his analysis as to the recommended military occupational assignment in which the new soldier may be potentially or actually qualified. This entry does not necessarily reflect the soldier’s main or second best occupation, but may be based upon background, leadership, hobbies, etc. The classifier will record the TM 12—427 military occupational title and specification serial number. The recommendation for a particular arm or service or for probable leadership may also be entered parenthetically when there are strong reasons for so specifying.
    Examples:
    “Automobile Mechanic—014.” “Basic—521 (FA).”
    “Basic—521 (Leadership probable).”
    55.	CLASSIFICATION IN MILITARY SPECIALTIES.
    As soon as an enlisted man has demonstrated his ability to perform a military job as skilled or semiskilled, or has demonstrated potential ability, the military specialty in which he is considered qualified will be recorded in this item. The practice of failing to give a soldier a military specialty in accordance with his skill merely because the Table of Organization does not authorize that many or such specialists, or of awarding a military specialty merely to fill a T/0 vacancy, is prohibited.
    a.	Designation. Enter the exact TM 12^27 military occupational title of the skill in which the soldier is being classified.
    23A
    AGO 216A
    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    TM 12—425
    55
    6.	Spec. Ser. No. Record the TM 12-427 military occupational specification serial number of the title entered.
    c.	Degree of Skill. The soldier’s degree of efficiency in the military occupational specialty will be determined by his company commander or section chief, in collaboration with the unit personnel officer. The three possible ratings which can be entered are:
    (1)	Potential. If he has sufficient familiarity with his tools and equipment and has such aptitudes and qualities as clearly warrants the assumption that he will become qualified as semiskilled or skilled with additional training and experience. Such men should be able to perform the various elements of the job under close supervision.
    (2)	Semiskilled. If he can perform his duties under similar conditions but requires supervision.
    (3)	Skilled. If the enlisted man has demonstrated that, given the tools and equipment of his occupation, he can perform all of his duties under sustained field, combat, or operating conditions without supervision beyond that inherent in the job itself. On all issues of the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 containing separate columns for “Potential,” “Semiskilled,” and “Skilled,” this entry will be made by recording the date of determination, in the appropriate column, for example, “10 Sep 43.” In addition, the initials “RTC” will be recorded along with the degree of proficiency, skilled, semiskilled, or potential, in those cases where an MOS is acquired through replacement training center training. (See par. 14c, TM 12-427.) On issues of the qualification card prior to 1 February 1942, a saving of lines can be accomplished by entries as follows:
    Designation	Spec. Ser. No.	Degree of skill	Date of class
    Cook	060	S-SK	SK 4 Apr 43	4 Nov 43 RTC
    The “Date of classification” column may then be used to indicate “Type of equipment,” where applicable.
    d. Type of Equipment. The particular type of equipment used in the military job in which the soldier has been classified will be entered in this column, when applicable. For example:
    Designation	Spec. Serial No.	Potential	Semiskilled	Skilled	Type of equipment
    Cannoneer	531		3 May 43 RTC		155 MM
    e. Deletion. Entries will be deleted only when it becomes apparent from actual and reasonable trial that the soldier cannot satisfactorily perform the duties of the specialty either for physical or psychological reasons or because of lack of knowledge or skill. Action for deletion of the military specialty will be initiated by the soldier’s immediate commander as soon as the deficiency becomes apparent Where deletion is contemplated, the organization commander who recommended the rating will be consulted if possible. The deletion
    will be made by a qualified officer lining through and initialing the entry. Entries will not be removed for disciplinary reasons. When a military occupational specialty is deleted, a reference will be made to “Remarks” and a statement made under “Remarks” stating briefly the reason for the disqualification.
    /. Entries for Service Schools. Upon completion of a specialty at a service school, when, in the opinion of the commandant of the school, the
    24
    AGO 218A
    17 Jnn 44
    enlisted man is able to perform the specialty in at least a semiskilled manner, an entry will be made in this item. In addition, the initials “SS” will be recorded along with the degree of proficiency, skilled, semiskilled, or potential in those cases where an MOS is acquired through completion of a service school. (See par. 14c, TM 12-427.) Entries under “Classification in military specialties” will include the title of the military classification, the specification serial number of the specialty, the date of graduation, and the type of equipment with which the enlisted man is proficient. Classification as “Skilled” or “Semiskilled” should be approached from the viewpoint of job performance as well as ability or proficiency as a student.
    Example:
    Designation	Spec. Serial No.	Potential	Semiskilled	Skilled	Type of equipment
    Teletypewriter mechanic	239		23 Aug 43 SS		M-14 M-15 M-19
    If, in the opinion of the commandant, the enlisted man is not qualified as skilled or semiskilled, no entry will be made in this item.
    g. Potential WCO. Where a soldier exhibits marked qualities of leadership during the training period, prior to transfer he will be given a military occupational specialty, and an additional entry, “Pot. NCO” will be marked in red ink under the “Degree of skill'5 columns in this section. For W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 (1 Feb 1942 edition), the words “Pot. NCO” will be entered in the unused Degree of Skills column; these will ordinarily be the “Potential” and “Semiskilled” columns. For W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 issued to 1 February 1942, the entry “SK,” “S-SK,” or “Pot” will be followed by the words “Pot. NCO” written in red ink. For example, if a soldier had been trained in a replacement training center as an automatic rifleman, SSN 746, during training had exhibited marked qualities of leadership, and had been an acting corporal, the entry under the “Classification in military specialties” section would be “Automatic rifleman, 746, Pot. NCO, 10 Feb. 44.”
    56.	REMARKS.
    The space provided under “Remarks” is to be used for supplementary information and facts of
    TM 12-425
    55—56
    value in further explanation and description of other items on the card. Also, certain information is specified for entry therein. If the space in any other item on the card is insufficient to complete information called for, the additional facts are to be recorded under “Remarks.” The usual manner of recording is to print “See 28” in the original item, signifying that reference is made to “Remarks” for further information; then, in “Remarks,” immediately preceding the entry, cross-reference is made to the original item on the card by indicating the number of the item, in parenthesis. While entries should be made in “Remarks” whenever necessary, the space is to be conserved and used in a judicious manner. Start each entry immediately following the preceding one, and do not start each entry on a separate line. All entries will be as brief as
    possible and will have a direct bearing on the soldier’s qualifications as they relate to military duty assignments.
    a- Prison Records. Records of confinement in a penal or correctional institution, either prior to or during military service will not be entered on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20.
    b.	Religious Preference. No entry indicating religious preference will be made on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20.
    c.	Driving Ability and Qualification in Arms. In issues of qualification cards which do not contain specific items for entering driver’s experience and qualification in arms, these items will be reproduced under “Remarks” in the approximate form as shown on 1 April 1943 or later editions of the qualification card. Instructions for making entries in these items are contained in paragraphs 59 and 60.
    d.	Scarce Categories of Specialized Skill. The symbol “(OPS)” will be entered in red ink under “Remarks,” at the reception center, for each soldier considered qualified within one or more of the fields of specialized skill enumerated in current directives on Scarce Categories of Specialized Skill. When the Personnel Placement Questionnaire, W.D., A.G.O. Forms Nos. 0850 and 0850a,
    AGO 216A
    25
    TM 12 425
    56-58
    have been executed and forwarded in conformity with existing directives, an entry will be made in red ink as: “0850 fwd 2 Feb 44.” The commanding officer of each replacement training center, or other unit, may line out the symbol “OPS” on Form No. 20 of individuals whose qualifications are considered not to meet the specifications shown in the current directives on Scarce Categories of Specialized Skill.
    e.	Oversea Service. Dates of departure from and arrival at a port in the United States, or the boundary of the continental United States, will be entered in this item. Example: “Left contl. U. S. 16 Mar 44. Returned 25 Nov 44.” Day of departure and day of return are included.
    f.	Close Overhead Fire. Notation will be made under “Remarks,” regardless of date of issue of the WD AGO Form No. 20, the first time an individual is subjected to close overhead fire on an infiltration course. Model remark: “Infiltration Course 18 Jun 43.”
    57.	RECORD OF CURRENT SERVICE.
    a.	Entries to he made. An entry will be made in this section whenever a soldier—
    (1)	Receives 1 week or more of basic or individual training at a reception center, replacement training center, or unit.
    (2)	Undergoes a permanent change in principal duty. Minor or temporary changes will not be entered.
    (3)	Changes grade. (In order to avoid the necessity of using an additional line for change of grade when such change of grade does not involve change of duty, this may be entered in pencil for the current grade. When a new line is accomplished for any of the other reasons cited herewith, the entry on previous line will be completed in ink.)
    (4)	Is transferred to a new organization, company, unit, or installation.
    (5)	Goes on detached service for over 30 days.
    (6)	Attends a service school.
    (7)	Participates in Army Specialized Training Program. (See sec. VII.)
    (8)	Has been a prisoner of war and returns to the jurisdiction of the United States Army.
    (9)	Is separated from the service.
    b.	Recording. The individual parts of this item will be entered as follows:
    (1)	Date. The date of the change of status will be entered in this column, for example: “4 Feb 44.”
    (2)	Organization and station. For designated Table of Organization units enter only the designation of the company and unit. For numbered serv
    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    ice units, detachments and other installations, enter the official designation (and number, if any) of the unit, detachment or installation, and the station to which assigned. Official abbreviations are authorized.
    (3)	Grade. Record the grade held by the enlisted man at the time of the entry.
    (4)	Principal duty. Enter a title descriptive of the general nature of the principal duty, for example: “Truck driver,” “Typist,” etc. Individual training carried on under a Mobilization Training Program will be entered as, for example: “17 Wks Indiv Tng Compl Per MTP 21-2,- 15 Apr 44.” If a specialized training school is attended such information should also be recorded, for example: “Spec Tng Sch (course) Compl (number of weeks) (date).” A duty will not be considered a principal duty until such time as it has been performed for a period of at least 1 month. Entry may be made in pencil until such time as the duty is determined to be a permanent change of principal duty, at which time it will be completed in ink.
    (5)	Spec. Ser. No. Enter the appropriate TM 12-427 military specification serial number for the principal duty recorded. When entries are made on cards issued prior to 1 September 1943, the specification serial number will be entered after the title of the principal duty.
    (6)	Returned Prisoner of War. Record date of capture and “Prisoner of War,” along with the name of the country capturing or holding the enlisted man a prisoner. Example: “6 Jun 1943— Japan—Prisoner of War.” On the next line an entry will be made to indicate the date and the manner in which he returned, such as escaped, exchanged, or repatriated. Entry will also be made for a soldier evading capture or returned after internment in a neutral country.
    (7)	Termination of service. Upon termination of service for any cause, an appropriate entry will be made in this item, showing date of termination and reason therefor, for example: “4 Feb 44— Disch. Conv. of Govt.,” or “2 Jan 44—Commissioned 2d Lt. AUS” or “4 March 44—Killed in action.”
    58.	DATES AND SIGNATURES.
    a. Entries. (1) Date of enlistment or induction. The date of enlistment or induction will be entered at the first interview either by printing, typing or stamping, and will be recorded as, for example, “25 Jan 44.’ Cross out either “Induction” or “Enlistment” to eliminate the inapplicable word. In the case of enlisted men of the National Guard inducted into Federal service, record the date of enlist-
    26
    AGO 216A
    17 Jnn 44
    TM 12-425
    91—92
    complete and accurate enough for anyone reading the card to have an adequate understanding of the work performed by the officer.
    d.	Name and Address of Employer. In this space record the name and complete address of the employer.
    e.	Dates Employed and Remuneration. Record the inclusive years of employment after “From” and “To.” Months and days need not be shown unless the employment was for a period of less than 1 year. Under “Monthly salary or income” enter the average monthly wage received.
    f.	Specification Serial No. Line out the words “AR 605-90” (or AR 615-26) and enter “TM 12-405” immediately above. Proper code numbers for the work history recorded will be found in TM 12-405. Directions for the use of TM 12-405 are self-contained. The words “Occupational dictionary code” will be lined out. No Occupational Dictionary Code is entered.
    »2. QUALIFICATION IN MILITARY SPECIALTIES.
    The following procedures and minimum qualifications are established and will obtain in designating military occupational specialties:
    a.	Definition. A military occupational specialty is a title applying to a group of related duties and responsibilities normally requiring special knowledge and skills acquired through formal training, experience, or education.
    b.	Purpose. Military occupational specialties are assigned to provide code numbers and titles for recognized military jobs and their qualifications by which officers, commissioned and warrant, may be requisitioned and assigned in accordance with the needs of the Army.
    c.	Awarding Military Occupational Specialty. One or more military occupational specialties may be acquired in one of the following manners:
    (1)	Successful completion of a course in a general or special service school if it has been determined by the training branch or section of the appropriate command, arm, or service that the course qualifies a graduate in a military occupational specialty upon completion thereof and without service on the job.
    (2)	On-the-job training or duty assignment for sufficient time that in the opinion of the rating officer such performance has been at least very satisfactory and that the officer is fully qualified to perform the duties provided for in the specifications. Normally a period of at least 30 days should precede assign
    AGO 216A
    ment of military occupational specialties under these circumstances.
    (3)	Through civilian experience, when it has been a practical counterpart of the military job, plus such military orientation or indoctrination as is necessary to the satisfactory performance of such job. Normally such period of time should be a minimum of 30 days. Under such circumstances the assignment of the military occupational specialties must be concurred in by the rating officer.
    Note. The above methods are to be construed as establishing only minimum standards for the assignment of the military occupational specialties, and each major command may establish such additional requirements as it deems necessary and such methods as will assure adherence to these minimum standards.
    d.	Recommendation of Assignment. In order to assure the most appropriate initial assignment of officers, an entry of probable military occupational specialties will be made, with pencil, in this item. Such entry will not constitute a fully qualified designation of the skill but will be considered as a recommendation for assignment purposes only. Pencil entries will not be reported to the Machine Records Unit. When the officer has been found fully qualified, and the military occupational specialty assigned in accordance with c above, the entry will be made in ink and reported to the Machine Records Unit.
    e.	Use of Military Occupational Specialty. The requirements and use of each military occupational specialty, together with identifying code numbers, are listed in TM 12-406 and 12-407. Prompt reporting of military occupational specialty, when assigned, to the Machine Records Unit will serve to utilize fully the knowledge and skills of the officers in the Army.
    /. Rescission or Removal of the Military Occupational Specialty. Military occupational specialties entered on the WD AGO Form No. 66—1 may be removed or rescinded by lining out the military occupational specialty. This may be accomplished for the following reasons:
    (1)	When it is obvious that the military occupational specialty is wrong, that is, when neither the officer’s duty assignment record, background, or school record correlates with such military occupational specialty. Rescission in such case shall be made by the current rating officer.
    (2)	When, in the judgment of the rating officer, the officer concerned is no longer qualified for such specialty. In such instances, concurrence in writing must first be obtained from the rating officer’s im
    37
    TM 12-423
    92—94
    mediate superior or such other authority as may be designated by each of the major commands.
    (3)	When a “Manner of performance” rating of Unsatisfactory” has been rendered. Such rating shall constitute authority for rescission of the military occupational specialty.
    Note. Rescission or removal of the military occupational specialty will be shown on the Morning Report under “Remarks’ and forwarded to the Machine Records Unit servicing the command. Lined out military occupational specialty will be initialed and dated by the responsible officer.
    g. Recording. Enter the appropriate TM 12-406 or 12-407 military occupational specialty title in which the officer has been qualified. Record the appropriate TM 12-406 or 12-407 specification serial number and enter the date of qualification. On editions of the WD AGO Form No. 66-1 issued prior to 1 September 1943, the words “Primary” and “Secondary” are to be lined out and these items combined, and all military occupational specialties will be added to this section in ink, chronologically, as acquired.
    93.	INITIAL INTERVIEW BY.
    Print or type date of interview, and name, grade, and arm or service of the interviewing officer. The signatures of the interviewing officer and of the officer being interviewed will be entered in the appropriate lines. Facsimile signatures will not be used.
    94.	REMARKS.
    This item will be used for further information for which there is either no appropriate space on the card or insufficient room in the space provided. All entries will be as brief as possible and will have a direct bearing on the officer’s qualifications as they relate to military duty assignments. Examples of specific information which should be recorded under this item include:
    a.	Prior Service. Prior enlisted service (other than service school record) or length of service in Army Specialist Corps will be entered under this item. Example: “EM 5 Yrs.—3 Yrs. Regt Sgt Major—2 Yrs. Rad Opr.”
    b.	Campaign Medals and Ribbons. Campaign medals and ribbons which the officer is authorized to wear will be shown in this item. Example: “Auth: Am. Def. Medal; Am. Theater Ribbon.” Authority to wear service bars will also be shown in this item.
    c.	Religious Preference. Religious preference of the officer will be entered in this item. If
    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    the officer’s preference is Protestant, the denomination should be entered, if possible. Examples: “Rel Pref: Catholic” or “Rel Pref: Baptist.” If the officer specifically states that he has no religious preference, enter “Rel Pref: None.”
    d.	Retail to Specific Arms or Services. Entry will be made in this item relative to all details to specific arms or services and the dates thereof. The original entry will indicate the arm or service to which detailed, with the effective date thereof, followed by word “terminated,” allowing sufficient space thereafter for subsequent entry for date of termination of such detail. Example: “Det. FA, 1 May 42, Term._________________”
    e.	Training in Map Reading. When the officer has completed the prescribed course in map and aerial photography reading or is certified as proficient in these subjects, an entry will be made in this item showing such completion, for example, “Qual. Map and Aerial Photo. Read.” followed by the date of such qualification.
    /. Close Overhead Fire. Notation will be made in this item, regardless of date of issue of the WD AGO Form No. 66-1, the first time an individual is subjected to close overhead fire on an infiltration course. Example: “Infiltration Course 10 Jan 44.”
    g.	Requirements For Oversea Service. Other items covered in preparation for oversea service which are not indicated above, as for example, Chlorine Gas Chamber” may be shown under Remarks” if deemed essential for completion of the officers record. In order to conserve space, these entries may be made without adhering strictly to authorized abbreviations. However, care will be exercised to insure that entry is comprehensible.
    h.	Qualification in Arms. On issues of the WD AGO Form No. 66-1 issued prior to 1 September 1943, which do not contain a specific item for entering qualification in arms, this item will be reproduced under “Remarks,” in the approximate form as shown on 1 September 1943 or later editions of the qualification card. Instructions for making an entry in this item are contained in paragraph 95.
    i.	Disciplinary Action. No entry will be made concerning any disciplinary action taken against any officer.
    j.	Source of Commission. Information as to the method whereby a commission was obtained, other than graduation from officer candidate school,
    38
    AGO 216A
    TM 12-425
    94-95
    IS Dec 44
    C 1
    will be entered concisely in this item. Example: “Grad Sr ROTC Univ of Kansas June 1935 Inf,” or “Aptd Spec-Res AUS 1940.”
    k.	Oversea Service. Dates of departure from and arrival at a port in the United States, or the boundary of the continental United States, will be entered in this item. Example: “Left contl. U. S. 16 Mar 44. Returned 25 Nov 44.” Day of departure and day of return are included.
    I.	Reassignment Pursuant to Reclassification Board Proceedings.
    When an officer is reassigned pursuant to recommendations of Reclassification Board based on proceedings covering period for which an unsatisfactory manner of performance rating has been entered on WD AGO Form 66-1, an entry will be made in this item, Example: “Reassigned under par. 17, SO 40, WD, 16 Feb 44, pursuant recommendation of Reclassification Board.”
    95.	QUALIFICATIONS IN ARMS.
    Entry will be made in this item showing the firing
    AGO 816A
    38A
    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    accomplished with individual, crew-served, and combat vehicular weapons. Entries will include—
    a.	Qualification Firing. Note the weapon, course fired, qualification attained, score, and date the individual fires any weapon for qualification.
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score	Date
    Rifle, Ml LMG (cs)	"A” Qual	s EG	127 218	1 Jul 43 9 Sep 43
    b.	Familiarization or Other Firing. When an officer completes familiarization firing, or when he is transferred prior to completing, or for any other reason fails to complete prescribed qualification or familiarization firing, make one entry for each weapon fired, noting the weapon, course fired (or started), total number of rounds fired, and date when individual fired weapon last.
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score	Date
    Carbine Ml Pistol MG, HB	Fam CS-A		20 rds 15 rds 50 rds	19 Sep 43 20 Oct 43 3 Nov 43
    96.	MAINTENANCE OF W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 66-1.
    The commanding officer of the headquarters where the cards are filed is responsible for obtaining and recording all information on officers in his command. It is the responsibility of each officer’s unit commander to transmit to the headquarters where the cards are filed, all changes necessary to keep tire cards current.
    97.	REMAKING W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 66-1.
    a.	When it is necessary to remake the qualification card for any reason other than “Record of service” item being filled, the qualification card will be copied exactly, unless definite error is discovered in previous entries, together with date of initial interview and date the card was remade. The officer remaking the card will sign as interviewing officer rather than
    TM 12-425
    95-98
    copying the name of the original interviewing officer. If the “Record of service” item becomes filled, the information contained therein will be consolidated and summarized at the discretion of the officer remaking the card. Such information may be consolidated by “Manner of performance” rating when such consolidation will also give a fair indication of the various types of duty performed by the officer. The old card will then be destroyed by the responsible officer.
    b.	Cards of Warrant Officers. Cards of warrant officers who accept commissions or Army Specialist Corps members separated from that Corps for the purpose of accepting a commission in the Army of the United States will not be transmitted to The Adjutant General’s office. In such cases entries in inapplicable items will be lined out and initialed by the officer correcting the card, and necessary changes made. A new W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1 may be prepared when the condition of the original card so requires.
    98.	DISPOSITION OF W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 66-1.
    a. Initial Assignment. When an officer is initially assigned his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which assigned.
    (1) After the officer has been assigned or transferred to a subordinate unit, the card will be sent to the commanding officer of that unit for his information, after which it will be returned for file. The card will not be rolled, creased, or folded. When forwarded by mail, a heavy protecting envelope of appropriate size, marked, “Do not fold, roll, or crease,” will be used and, when available, cardboard backing will be used as an additional protection.
    b. Transfer Within United States. (1) When an individual officer is transferred to another station within the United States, his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which transferred in time to arrive simultaneously with or ahead of the officer.
    (2) When a unit changes station, the qualification cards of the officers assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with the unit records in the custody of the commander of the unit.
    c. Transfer to Oversea Station or From Oversea Station to The United States. (1) When an individual officer is transferred to an oversea station from the United States the commanding general of the port of embarkation through which the officer travels will cause to be
    AGO 216A
    39
    TM 12-425	15 Dee 44
    98	Cl
    prepared an extract of qualification card incorporat-	tion who will then follow	the procedures prescribed
    ing items 1,2, 3,4, 5,6,7, 8, and 15. Extract will be	in c (1) above.
    certified by an administrative officer on the port staff. (2) When an individual officer is transferred to The officer being transferred will sign the extract	the United States from an oversea station, he will
    acknowledging receipt of the original qualification	carry his qualification card with him. Prior to decard. The original qualification card will then be	livering the card into the custody of the individual,
    delivered to the officer and the extract mailed to The	his commanding officer will cause to be prepared an
    Adjutant General, Washington 25, D. C., marked	extract of qualification card, incorporating items 1,
    Attention, Officers Branch, Records Section. ’	2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 15.	The extract will be certi-
    (a)	When an individual officer is transferred to	fied by an officer other than the individual to whom W
    an oversea station from the United States and moves	it pertains. The officer being transferred will sign
    directly to a port of embarkation for trans-shipment	the extract acknowledging receipt of the original
    overseas, his qualification card will be mailed to the	card. The original card will then be delivered to
    port of embarkation in time to arrive simultaneously °ff*cer an(l the extract mailed to The Adjutant with or ahead of the officer.	General, Washington 25, D. C., marked Attention:
    (6)	When an individual officer is transferred to a	Branch, Records Section.
    replacement depot in the United States for utilization (3) When 8 ”n,t “ “°Ved eitherj t0 " fr°,™ an ,	,	,	, oversea station, the qualification cards of the officers
    as an oversea loss replacement his qualification card	,	,	,	, . ,
    .„ .	,	.	.	assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with
    will be mailed to the replacement depot in time to .i	. .. x ,	. .	.	.
    ,	...	,	, , ,	„	the umt records in the custody of the commander of
    arrive simultaneously with or ahead of the officer. ti__
    (c)	When an officer is transferred from a replace- (4) When for any reason an officer is returned ment depot on a shipment number, his qualification	to the United States from an oversea station, his
    card will be given to the escort officer for delivery	qualification card will be forwarded as outlined in
    to the commanding general of the port of embarka- paragraph c (2) or (3) above.
    i2gga&i-\ZNF_K£SJ_AJ_1_	m > .
    W “W •	HiwtnwiI (MiDOLt K*Mtl	team HUM4M	cohpohiht Ihusht wiioht Oat< or birth raci f
    ■	<9)»0	' tiAR7lBOR7Ht| "arm or »m7r oJ^'i (11) . 0	VWQMJ	I	•
    *? WAR SERVlCt	J	COMBATtiLiM^T^^LtHTWCAiACAuTMORiTYXlR-^g^	y CBADI jX-wrriMB
    „ t . I. ■	'	, Ji(12)-0	or	y;
    *«*«• months SIR* con.)	wi out*RESIDENCE OVUtOC _	. /CrPMdwV /iCOO)	*>	"
    \ 1 CCC.--------------CONTINENTAL V * LOCATION IT	J , [/y-Z/J VfA»t gZ. MONTH*; J_-
    SERVICE	V 4 TH Co TMDl?	(13) ENTRY ON EWtNDEO ACTIVE DUTY	'	I AUTHORITY MR	o	t <38
    «	|	|	| "l	0^1 Or EN.TRtJJ^FP *1 IHONIED SC—DATE /	*
    • ■  _____________________ («)»(*> GRADE—APPOINTMENT* ANO PROMOTIONS _______________________||-	1
    "	W*l**o«T •RAOS WARRANT OFFICER Z"° LIEUTENANT 1ST LIEUTENANT CAPTAIN	MAJOR LT COLONEL COLONEL 2 J
    W WE APPOINTED OR PR0M0TT9	***	®
    DATE OF RANK IN GRADE	[	~|?wg SO | s.tp W ' [^ Fig yV j
    QB) • *■	(15) »0 RECORD OF SERVICE (ONLY principal DUTYI	’‘"""""ll	© #
    ©-•» j TYPE OF DUTY UN%£RSG™,”TION -—./T5 To-S INITIALsI TYPE OF DUTY ' UN%^GTJ?J'&T,0N “	To-S'INITIALS « IOj O
    -ipijiTcpid Lpid/a? th tnEZ liae-ysiiaasT Jeji	ZZZZZZZZ= ZZZZ2ZZZ2ZZ	; ’•’ •
    •	°	Q fldJ Gsn'3 ScH /uhMLSal_8J>em_____________________________________________________________S I -
    . | Bai Afk/ 127^ Tnf wte+J«___________________________________________________________________________if s.
    ' _ .[g Bai AM—JaiV ZNF k F£B WSUf^(J&tII__________________I	_ fc-
    " "s BEET AM ictsJ J~NF___lt,F£B^ | l II__________________________________________________ _	11 -
    W *i----------------------------------------------|_____________________________________________________________0
    I--------------------------------------------------------------
    ----------------------------------r|-------	—	------------*
    =~—-----------------------------------------------------==r-
    ©-••j	'	'	~	i TLBe 221 nH#/„ aa/fke^7vr_ ZZ x /HF FL_ CaEL— i-S- Basic	H____3C ‘F Z4? Co /6f ir /HF KEG r PVT c.l£Ahtipist fOS tn
    --------------------------------------Ha Co tot ‘ r /Hf keg r cpl ao* ■*'?<> s&z o * * ______________________________________QJniH Ha Co- fO/(T /HF REGT Str AdhHco fpz •
    D (22)-© SERVICE SCHOOLS. ARM "“HF COURSE	| . . - .	_______
    DC _ OP SERVICE	[ WfEKS |____________________| AATIN6 (IF ANY) J
    <	..........................................................~~. | ~ £ • • I
    o ।	-------------- 1	-------------- 1 ■	-	' i h e
    7I______________	"I__________________________________________________________________ > _
    2-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------o
    O	- ‘.	■	„	--------------------------------------------------------------------o ©I
    9© — (23).® ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS	(24) SO (25) j________________	O© ©I
    B PREFERRED |--------------------------------------------------------------------
    <	|	T) I
    © Q =====-------	--------------------------------------------------------------------> • • I
    ~ (25)	_	1	Z * • I
    •	u	^47	I-------------------------I" ••	—"	— < •
    MWWIW = .IMI... t»ICi.lTn»	I’M 1.11 Au	rent, ...I t’ . .---	. — ■	- ■ ■■■_  -Zp © ©I
    jT S	DESIGNAru^	__ZZZZZZZ <<■«■»»<*»	X
    R 2 Sjhakpiah.________MS______—————————— — — m © ©j
    •	O CAEM.-Ttf’M______H-H_____________________________"" '	" "	'll	I ~ o
    •	W	/6J)£C HV3_____________________________________________________ □ • •]
    !g —	—-------------------:—3*7
    —---------------------------------------------------”.™-FT AgtlKP  I^^^°TAriT — UNDE^^iO CIRCUMSTANCES	CARD^^ FOLDED^ ROLLED. OR CR^^SEQ
    Figure 2. Sample of completed JF.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20—Back view.
    AGO 59A	29
    TM 12—425
    62—65
    17 Jun 44
    Section VII
    ARMY SPECIALIZED TRAINING PROGRAM
    62.	GENERAL.
    Various entries on the WD, AGO Form No. 20 have been authorized for the Army Specialized Training Program. Symbols for entries on this form will be found in appendix to TM 12—427. The following instructions will govern in recording these symbols on the WD, AGO Form No. 20.
    63.	TRAINEE SYMBOL.
    For all trainees in both basic and advanced curricula, the trainee symbol appropriate to the curriculum in which enrolled will be recorded under “Record of current service.” On Form No. 20 of an edition earlier than the revision of 1 September 1943, the word “Trainee” followed by the appropriate trainee symbol will be recorded as the “Principal duty.” On the revision of 1 September 1943, the word “Trainee” will be recorded as the “Principal duty” and the trainee symbol will be recorded as the “SSN.” When a trainee is transferred to a curriculum other than that in which initially enrolled, an appropriate change will be made under “Record of current service.” When a trainee is graduated from one curriculum and enrolled in another an additional entry under “Record of current service” will be made.
    64.	GRADUATE SYMBOL.
    a.	When a trainee is graduated from any curriculum for which there has been provided a graduate symbol, including both basic phase and advanced phase curricula, a thin line will be drawn in pencil through the code previously entered under “Main occupation,” on the WD, AGO Form No. 20, and directly above this code will be entered in pencil the symbol for the curriculum from which graduated.
    b.	An entry will be made in the case of a graduate of a curriculum who is continuing in the program in another curriculum as well as in the case of a graduate who is separated from the program. In the case of the graduate who is continuing in another curriculum, the graduate symbol thus entered will remain unchanged until such time as the trainee is graduated from the curriculum in which continued, when the previous graduate symbol will be erased and the new symbol entered in lieu thereof in the manner indicated in a above. If a graduate who continues in the program in another curriculum is separated from the program prior to graduation from the curriculum in which continued, the symbol previously entered will remain unchanged, except as provided in c below.
    c.	A trainee who is separated from the program prior to graduation for a special assignment based on training received under the Army Specialized Training Program will be considered a graduate of the curriculum in which enrolled when separated, and graduate symbol for the curriculum from which separated will be entered under “Main occupation.”
    d.	Changes made under “Main occupation” in accordance with the foregoing instructions will not be punched on WD, AGO Form No. 20.
    e.	A trainee who is initially assigned to the Army Specialized Training Program in an advanced term will not be considered a graduate of a basic phase curriculum.
    65.
    If the designated space is insufficient for the entry, a notation “see 28” will be made under “Record of current service” or “Main occupation” as the case may be, and the appropriate entry made under “Remarks,” shown as “(29) ” or “(13).”
    30
    AGO 59A
    10 Apr 45
    C 2
    c.	Oves’-Age in Grade. A penciled check mark “\/” be entered in this space if the officer’s age places him in a nontroop duty age status. If subsequent promotion places the officer within the troop-duty age limit, the check mark will be removed. Maximum age-in-grade limitations for duty with troop units, other than Army Air Forces, are:
    Colonel................................. 55
    Lieutenant Colonel...................... 52
    Major................................... 47
    Captain................................. 42
    First Lieutenant........................ 36
    Second Lieutenant....................... 36
    Maximum age for assignment of officers of the nonpromotion list services to troop units is 56 years, except that for assignment to the staff of a field army, the maximum is 58 years. An officer will be considered over age-in-grade the day he attains the age prescribed above.
    d.	Retired. Enter a check mark in the space allotted when a retired officer is recalled to active duty.
    77.	SERVICE OR RESIDENCE OUTSIDE CONTINENTAL U. S.
    If the officer has spent at least 3 consecutive months in a foreign country, print the name of the country as it was designated prior to 1935, followed by a notation, in parentheses, of the last year of the service or residence. In the spaces “Years” and “Months” record the years and months opposite the respective countries in which he had service or residence. This item refers to residence or military service prior to the present war and will not include tours of foreign duty after 7 December 1941. If either the word “Service” or “Residence” does not apply, line out the inappropriate word. If an officer has served or resided in more than one country outside the continental United States, enter the name of the last country served or resided in, the date of the termination, and the duration of such service or residence in that country. Cross reference to “Remarks,” if necessary, and there indicate other countries of service or residence and duration of stay in each.
    78.	ENTRY ON EXTENDED ACTIVE DUTY.
    Official orders provided the source for this information. Date of original entry, authority (par. and
    TM 12—425
    76-80
    SO No.), issuing headquarters, and date of issuance of the order, are required. If the officer was not continued on extended active duty after the initial period, indicate such break under “Remarks.” This item is not completed for regular army officers. For retired officers, the date of and authority for return to active duty will be indicated in this space.
    79.	GRADE-APPOINTMENTS AND PROMOTIONS.
    Enter the date of the appointment or promotion in which serving currently, in the appropriate rectangle. Any subsequent promotions, whether temporary or permanent, will be entered in like manner. Temporary promotions will be entered in the upper half of the rectangle to allow room for recording the date of permanent promotion to the same grade. The date of rank in grade will be secured from official orders. Dates of appointment or promotion prior to the grade ir. which an officer is serving at the initiation of his W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1 may also be entered.
    80.	RECORD OF SERVICE. (Enter principal duty).
    a.	Period Covered. For Regular Army Officers (except retired officers on active duty) the record of service will cover only those principal duties performed since 1 January 1942. For all other officers, including retired officers on active duty, the record of service will cover only those principal duties performed since 1 July 1940.
    b.	When Recorded. Whenever an officer is detailed or assigned to a principal duty, appropriate temporary pencil entry will be made on the first unused line. This temporary entry will be made permanent (entered in ink) under the following conditions:
    (1)	When a principal duty has been performed for a period of at least 1 month, and—
    (a)	There is a change in principal duty.
    (6)	The officer is reassigned.
    (c)	The individual’s immediate superior is reassigned.
    (/” in the box marked “c” or “xl,” beside the particular sport. If he both coached and participated, or coached and excelled, place check mark “\/” in two boxes. Do not check both “Participated” and “Excelled,” because if he excelled he obviously participated. If the officer played on a school, semi-professional, or professional team, the name and location of the team will be indicated, together with the name of the sport in parenthesis above the name and location of the team. Write in any other sport not named, and indicate the degree of participation in the appropriate box. The officer’s ability to coach is of main interest. An officer who excelled should be able either to teach the sport or to supervise activities therein. Other sports may be suggested by
    the following:
    Archery	La crosse
    Bowling	Polo
    Fencing	Soccer
    Football	Swimming
    Golf	Tennis
    Hockey	Track
    Hunting	Trapshooting
    jiu-jitsu	Wrestling
    90.	ACTIVE HOBBIES.
    Check the appropriate rectangle to indicate named hobbies. Only hobbies having military significance
    IO Apr 45
    C 2
    will be entered in the space “Other,” such as are suggested by the following:
    Art and illustration
    Ballistics
    Bird training	.	/
    Camouflage
    Chemistry
    Cryptology (codes and ciphers)
    Drafting
    Electricity
    Horse breeding
    Languages
    Map making Mathematics Mechanics Model making Theatrical entertainments Woodworking
    Hobbies such as coin collecting, dancing, attending movies, stamp collecting, etc., are not to be recorded.
    91.	MAIN AND SECONDARY CIVILIAN OCCUPATIONS.
    a.	General. These items will not be utilized for regular army officers. In dealing with these important items, take down the complete occupational history by making notes on a scratch pad. These notes are to be carefully checked, verified, and corrected. The best way to secure the information is to cover the most recent employment first; then proceed in reverse chronological order to earlier work. The preliminary discussion will disclose the number of jobs held, years engaged in each, and the average monthly salary. This information will give a broad picture of the officer’s work history so that an interviewer may make a preliminary analysis of the various jobs. A general idea of the type of work the officer has been doing has now been secured. The next step is to get detailed information for the analysis. The fact that these data must be accurate cannot be overemphasized. If the officer has more than one occupation, weigh one factor against another to determine which has more evidence to substantiate its claim as the main occupation. If two jobs compare closely on length of employment, recency, salary, etc., but one requires a higher degree of skill than the other, the more skilled job will ordinarily be the main occupation.
    b.	Title of Your Position or «Iob. In this space enter a descriptive title of the work history recorded. ,
    c.	Explain What you Did. Record this information in a brief manner. Be sure that it is
    36
    AGO 59A
    TM 12-425
    C 3
    Changes 1
    No. 3	/
    WAR DEPARTMENT
    Washington 25, D. C., 7 April 1945
    TECHNICAL MANUAL
    PERSONNEL CLASSIFICATION
    TM 12-425, 17 June 1944, is changed as follows:
    Paragraph 30c, page 14, between “weight” and “do” insert the words “from accompanying papers.”
    Paragraph 56/, page 26, delete.
    Appendix IVa, page 167, delete “School for Special and Morale Services” and substitute “School [AG 300.7 (29 Mar 45)]
    By order of the Secretary of War:
    for Personnel Services” in left hand column.
    Appendix IVb, page 168, Arm or Service Schools, add “School for Personnel Services............20”
    in right hand column.
    Remove pages 7, 8, 9 and 10, and substitute revised pages 7, 8, 9, and 10 herewith.
    Official:
    J. A. ULIO
    Major General
    The Adjutant General
    G. C. MARSHALL
    Chiej of Staff
    Distribution:
    AAF (10) ; AGF (10) ; ASF (2); Dept (10) ;S Div ASF (1); Tech Sv (2); SvC (10); PC&S (1);
    Gen & Sp Sv Sch (5); USMA (2); ASTU (1) ; ASF Tng C (5); Pers Reasgt C (10); RC (10); AGF Repl Tng C (15); A (10) ; CHQ (10); D (5); R (2); SBn (3).
    Refer to FM 21-6 for explanation of distribution formula.
    *. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1941
    LIB Rm. a i
    AGO114A—May 637201°—45
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    13-14
    roster prepared by the Machine Records Unit may be used, if desired, as the informational roster. Information contained on the informational roster will be modified to meet the requirements of each organization and each roster will carry a statement
    to the effect that qualification cards (WD AGO Form 20), recording the current status of each enlisted man, are available to organization officers.
    c. An extract of a sample completed roster appears below.
    To Company Commander, Co. A.
    10 Feb 1944 Hq. 10th Inf.
    Grade	Name	ASN	Education	AGCT score	MA score	Main civ. occup.	Asgt status (GA or LA)*	MOS	Duty assignment
    									Old	New	Degree skill
    CpI	Adams, P. L.	36142152	HS grad 1 yr. bus. school	11-116	Hi-102	Clerktypist	GA	405	405		....
    Pvt	Brown, A. F.	35182104	10 yrs.	HI-98	n-118	Truckdriver	GA	745	745	014	S-SK
    ’General assignment or limited assignment.
    14.	INVENTORY OF SPECIALISTS.
    The inventory of specialists, which is prepared by the unit personnel section at intervals determined by higher headquarters, consists of a comparison of the number of military occupational specialists on
    hand (O/H) with the number of such specialists authorized by Tables of Organization (T/O) or allotment of the unit and the resulting overage or shortage (O/S). An extract of a sample inventory of specialists appears below.
    INVENTORY OF SPECIALISTS.
    Date...........................
    Legend: Q — shortage.	Organization..............................
    MOS	Hq and Hq Co. 1st Bn			Co. A			Co. B			Co. C			Co. D			Total
    	T/O	O/H	O/S	T/O	O/H	O/S	T/O	O/H	O/S	T/O	O/H	O/S	T/O	O/H	O/S	T/O	O/H	O/S
    014	2	2			1	1							1	2	1	3	5	2
    055		1	1					1	1								2	2
    060	3	2	©	4	5	1	4	3	©	4	4		4	4		19	18	©
    824	1	1		1	2	1	1	1		1		©	1	1		5	5
    Total	6	6		5	8	3	5	5		5	4	©	6	7	1	27	30	3
    The inventory of specialists or the MOS Status Report prepared by Machine Records Unit, as forwarded through higher headquarters, will be the basis of the adjustment of overages and shortages within the subordinate units and organizations. Enter explanatory remarks, if considered
    necessary, to justify overages and shortages of personnel on the inventory of specialists or MOS Status Report forwarded to higher headquarters. Any shortages which remain after adjustment will be the basis for requisitioning personnel.
    AGO 114A
    7
    TM 12—425
    15-16
    7 Apr 45
    C 3
    SECTION IV
    TESTING
    15.	GENERAL.
    Various tests have been devised as an aid to assist in the proper classification of the soldier. These tests are employed at several stages of the classification process. Tests are used by classification and assignment personnel to obtain a better estimate of an individual’s abilities and aptitudes than can be gained from an interview alone. The personnel consultants and the classification and assignment officers in induction stations, reception centers, special training units, training centers, special service schools of the various arms and services, and tactical units use tests as an integral part of classification and assignment procedure.
    16.	TYPES OF TESTS.
    Army needs dictate the types of tests to be used. Each test has been developed for a particular purpose and use; therefore, it is important to choose the right test for each classification or selection problem. No test will be used which has not been previously authorized by The Adjutant General. Requests for special tests will be forwarded to The Adjutant General, Classification and Replacement Branch. Only scores of authorized tests will be recorded on WD AGO Form 20. Circular No. 443, War Department, 1944, as amended by section I, Circular No. 7, and section IV, Circular No. 82, War Department, 1945, and subsequent amendments, contain lists of authorized personnel classification tests. Some of these tests, together with the primary echelons in which they will be used, are listed below. Those tests marked with an asterisk (*) may be given in other echelons than the primary one for which they are listed. Decisions to use tests in other echelons should take into consideration both the problem and the characteristics of the available tests.
    a.	Induction Station Tests.
    Qualification Test, Q-l, Q-2 Group Target Test-1, GT-1 Individual Examination IE-1 Nonlanguage Individual Examination, NIE-1
    Classification Test, R-l*
    Oral Trade Questions, Volume I, Supplements A, B and C*
    b.	Reception Center Tests.
    Army General Classification Test, 3a*
    Army Radio Code Aptitude Test, ARC-1*
    Oral Trade Questions, Volume I, Supplements A, B and C*
    c.	Special Training Unit Tests.
    Army Illustrated Literacy Test DST-lla
    Army Individual Test, AIT-1*
    Unit Tests, DST-12, DST-13, DST-14, DST-15
    Unit Test in Arithmetic, DST-16a
    d.	Training Center Tests.
    Clerical Aptitude Test, CA-1*
    Dictation Test*
    General Mechanical Aptitude Test, MA-2, MA-3*
    Nonlanguage Test, 2 a, b, c*
    Typing Test*
    e.	Army Air Forces Installations.
    Trade Information Test, TC-la
    General Technical Test, TC-2a
    Weather Aptitude Test, TC-3a
    Cryptography Test, TC-4a
    Nut and Bolt Manual Dexterity Test, TC—5a
    U-bolt Assembly Test TC-6a
    Technical Trade Test, TC-7a
    /. Women’s Army Corps Tests.
    Classification Test, R-l*
    Women’s Classification Test, WCT-2 (Formerly called Mental Alertness Test, MAT-2)
    Typing Test*
    Army General Classification Test, 3a*
    Mechanical Aptitude Test, MA-4, X-l
    Clerical Aptitude Test, CA-2, X-2
    Army Radio Code Aptitude Test, ARC-1*
    Driver and Automotive Information Test, TK-2, X-l
    Arithmetic Test, EA-3, X-2
    Oral Trade Questions, Volume I, Supplements A, B and C*
    8
    AGO 114A
    7 Apr 45
    C 3
    g.	Army Specialized Training Program Tests. Special selection and achievement tests have been constructed for the Army Specialized Training Program; these tests are authorized for this program only.
    h.	United States Disciplinary Barracks and Rehabilitation Center Tests. Tests are authorized for use in United States Disciplinary Barracks and Rehabilitation Centers in accordance with current War Department directives.
    17.	INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF TESTS.
    Manuals providing instructions for administering and scoring are furnished for all authorized tests. Additional information will be found in TM 12-260. Qualifying scores of the various tests are set by special directives.
    a.	Induction Station Tests. Procedures for testing at armed forces induction stations are described in the manual Psychological Examining, A Manual for Induction Stations, 1 February 1943, and apply as amended and supplemented by letter AG 220.01 (23 Mar 44) OC-H-SPGAP, 19 May 1944, subject: “Standards and Procedures for Determining the Minimum Mental Capacities Required for Induction into the Armed Forces,” and subsequent directives.
    b.	Reception Center Tests. The Army General Classification Test will be given to all men except illiterates and non-English speaking men. The Army Radio Code Aptitude Test will be given to all men who receive a standard score of 85 or more on the Army General Classification Test. It is desirable that these tests be given before the interview so that the scores will be available to the interviewer. The Oral Trade Questions will be given by the interviewer when there is a need to check trade knowledge. These tests will be administered in accordance with the instructions contained in volume I of the Oral Trade Questions.
    (1)	In testing enlisted men at reception centers, no man will be excluded from the test by any rough criterion such as completion of the fourth grade. This practice is undesirable in that it presents opportunity for error when men are confused and unaccustomed to their new surroundings. Men who were found to be illiterate at induction stations will not be given the Army General Classification Test until near the conclusion of training in the
    TM 12-425
    1G—17
    Special Training Unit. For such men, entry on the WD AGO Form 20 will be made in pencil at the reception center, indicating illiterate or non-English, and Form 20 will not be punched for these items. Completion and punching of these items will be done at the conclusion of training in the Special Training Unit.
    (2)	Tests will be given to men only when they are in normal physical or mental condition. The test period will be scheduled for a time of day when men are not likely to be fatigued; it will be neither late in the day nor following hours of strenuous work. Men who are ill or who have just been given inoculations are in no condition to be tested. Unless these precautions are observed, the test does not present a true picture of the man’s normal capabilities. A commissioned officer qualified to conduct tests will be present in the testing room during the administration of each test and will supervise and control test procedure.
    (3)	A standard score of 110 or better on the Army General Classification Test is required for attendance at an officer candidate school. A standard score of 115 or better on the Army General Classification Test is required for participation in the Army Specialized Training Program. This will not be construed to include scores made on 2 abc or other nonlanguage classification tests.
    c.	Special Training Unit Tests. The Army General Classification Test will be given to all men assigned to Special Training Units near the conclusion of such training, including men tested prior to such assignment.
    d.	Training Center Tests. The Clerical Aptitude Test, CA-1, will be given to men being considered for clerical training who have had no clerical experience. The Nonlanguage Test, 2 abc, may be given to men who, by reason of lack of language or literary skill, are unable to make a valid score on the Army General Classification Test. The General Mechanical Aptitude Test may be administered at training centers for the purpose of selecting men to attend training courses of a mechanical nature.
    e.	Army Air Forces Installations Tests. These tests will be given as directed in Army Air Forces Manual 35-1, 3 April 1944.
    /. Women’s Army Corps Test. The testing program of the Women’s Army Corps is conducted in accordance with directives and manuals issued. Classification Test R—1 is given to all appli
    AGO 114A
    9
    TM 12-425
    17-20
    cants for Women’s Army Corps. If a retest is necessary at the recruiting station, the Women’s Classification Test, WCT-2 is used. The Army General Classification Test is given to all members of the Women’s Army Corps at the training centers.
    g. Army Specialized Training Program Tests. These tests are administered in accordance with monthly directives issued by The Adjutant General.
    18.	RETESTING.
    Readministration of any authorized test will be permitted when in the opinion of the Commanding Officer the original test is considered invalid for any reason. Whenever possible an alternate form of the test should be used. Results of retests will be recorded on the WD AGO Form 20 with date of administration. Alteration of test scores on WD AGO Form 20, without retesting, is regarded as a falsification of official records. Corrections of improper entries should be indicated as such. Tests should not be administered more than twice.
    19.	ARMY GRADES AND STANDARD SCORES.
    The manner of interpreting scores on Army tests has been prescribed in the manuals for administration of such tests. Raw scores, standard scores, and Army grades bear no relation to such concepts as the “IQ” (intelligence quotient), or “MA” (mental age). Results on Army tests will therefore not be interpreted in terms of these concepts. A man’s performance on a test is generally expressed in terms of an Army grade and a standard score. The standard score compares the particular soldier with all the others who have taken the same test. On every test a standard score of 100 indicates average Army performance. Standard scores below 100 are below average; those above 100 are better than average. Often it is not necessary to know the exact position of a soldier’s standard score but merely the broad category into which his score falls. For this purpose standard scores are divided into five broad groups called Army grades. The following discussion of the meaning of Army grades, while based primarily on the Army General Classification Test may be construed to apply, with modifications, to all other tests for which Army grades are given. The grade a man earns on the General Classification Test furnishes a fairly reliable index of his general mental ability, that is, his ability to learn, to follow directions, and to adapt to new and varied situations.
    17 Jun 44
    a.	Grade I includes standard scores of 130 and above. Men in this grade possess a high level of general mental ability. When they possess other necessary characteristics, they are potential officers, warrant officers, and noncommissioned officers. Their ability also makes them potential technical specialists.
    b.	Grade II includes standard scores between 110 and 129. Nearly all of these men are capable of performing the skilled administrative and technical work of the Army. Many of them are potential officers and warrant officers. Men at this level are a primary source for skilled technicians and noncommissioned officers.
    c.	Grade III includes standard scores between 90 and 109. This is the largest group in the Army. These men are of average mental ability and usually have the capacity necessary to perform adequately in such jobs as duty noncommissioned officers, general specialists (radio operators, telephone and telegraph linemen, some clerks and cooks), combat specialists (scouts, mortar gunners, machine gunners, artillerymen) , aircrew groundmen, and the like. Some men in this category make excellent noncommissioned officers and technicians.
    d.	Grade IV includes standard scores between 60 and 89. These men are below average in their ability to learn new tasks and somewhat slow in their grasp of situations. Men in this group usually make dependable basic soldiers, may become cooks and bakers, truck drivers, cannoneers, riflemen, semiskilled specialists. Because they learn slowly, they need more supervision in training and duty than the three higher grades. Usually they are not capable of quick, original thinking and initiative in making decisions.
    e.	Grade V includes standard scores of 59 and below. Although these men are very slow learners, and not quick at grasping situations, they can perform adequately on many jobs. With careful supervision and training they will make dependable basic soldiers and may also be used as ammunition handlers, bath attendants, decontaminating equipment operators, laborers, pontooneers, truck drivers, and the like.
    20.	SECURITY OF TESTS.
    a.	Restricted Nature of Test Scores. The scores and grades received on any of the various tests will not be made public either to individuals or groups. This information will be restricted to administrative uses only. If a man asks for his score or grade he may be told that he received a good score, an average score, or a below average score. It
    IO
    AGO 114A
    TM 12-425
    C 4
    TECHNICAL MANUAL
    PERSONNEL CLASSIFICATION
    Changes!	WAR DEPARTMENT
    No. 4 J	Washington 25, D. C., 14 July 1945
    TM 12-425, 17 June 1944, is changed as follows:
    Change date of C 3 to read "7 May 1945” instead of ”7 April 1945.”
    Paragraph 81, page 35, add the following: "Army Education Program courses (RR 1-4) will be entered in this item. See paragraph 50g for example.”
    Remove pages 11 and 12 and substitute revised page 11 and page 12 herewith.
    Remove pages 23, 23A, and 24 and substitute page 23, revised pages 23A and 23B, and page 24 herewith.	‘
    Remove pages 25	and 26	and substitute revised	pages 25 and 26 herewith.
    Remove pages 37	and 38	and substitute revised	pages 37 and 38 herewith.
    Remove pages 39	and 40	and substitute revised	pages 39 and 40 and add new page 40A herewith.
    Remove pages 63	and 64	and substitute page 63	and revised page 64 herewith.
    [AG 300.7 (8 Mar 45)].
    By order of the Secretary of War:
    Official:
    EDWARD F. WITSELL
    Major General
    Acting The Adjutant General
    G. C. MARSHALL
    Chief of Staff
    Distribution:
    AAF (10); AGF (10); ASF (2); Dept (10); S Div ASF (1); Tech Sv (2); Sv C (10); PC & S (1); Gen & Sp Sv Sch (5); USMA (2); ASTU (1); ASF Tng C (15); AGF Repl Tng C-(15); RC (10); A (10); CHQ (10); D (except D 1) (5); R (2); Sep Bn (3).
    Refer to FM 21-6 for explanation of distribution formula
    AGO 10000A/1027A
    AGO 1027A—July 657607°—45
    NTSU LIBRARY
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    TM 12-425
    serves no useful purpose to permit men to draw comparisons by means of test scores.
    b.	Safeguarding of Test Material. Test materials are restricted, and it is imperative that proper safeguards be maintained. To accomplish this end, cabinets or chests with adequate locking devices will be provided. Testing materials will be locked in such containers at all times when not in actual use. Frequent inventories will be made.
    c.	Disposition of Excess and Useless Testing Material. (1) Whenever a unit or station has on hand damaged, wornout, or obsolete test booklets, scoring keys, answer sheets, etc., such material will be destroyed by shredding or burning at the post where it is located. A commissioned officer will witness the destruction.
    (2)	Units possessing current test material in excess of their needs will report such excesses to appropriate post pubheation stockrooms or, if overseas, to appropriate distributing agencies, who, in turn, will report their surpluses to the Adjutant General depot serving them, for instructions as to disposition.
    21.	TEST SUPPLIES.
    Test supplies, including test booklets, answer sheets, scoring keys and manuals, will be secured upon requisitions made to appropriate distributing agencies. For all authorized Army personnel classification tests, distributing agencies are indicated in monthly issues of FM 21-6.
    AGO 1027A
    11
    17 *Iun 44
    TM 12-425
    22-26
    Section V
    INTERVIEWING
    22.	DEFINITION.
    An interview is a planned and controlled conversation, with the objective of securing all possible data from the soldier that will be of value to the service.
    23.	INTERVIEWING TECHNIQUES.
    a.	The Army’s primary interest in the new soldier is: What has he done? What can he probably learn to do? The interviewer must remember that he is gathering actual information, facts, and data pertaining to the soldier. He should open the conversation with something of interest to the soldier that will put him at ease and yet suggest that the Army is interested in him as an individual. The interviewer should be on the alert and evidence interest in the information obtained. He should endeavor to understand the other man’s point of view. He must discount his own bias and cultivate an open mind.
    b.	Successful interviewing is difficult when the soldier is unduly fatigued, frightened, or irritated. Pleasant surroundings, with maximum privacy, are desirable. Ample time should be allowed for the interview, which should be adjusted to the poise and alertness of the soldier. Impatience with slow talkers will often defeat the accuracy of the interview. Questions should be asked in a courteous but businesslike manner, keeping the soldier aware of the definite purpose of the interview. Questions should be worded so they are easily understood. Leading questions should be avoided. Questions which imply a certain answer usually receive that answer.
    c.	The interviewer must get all the pertinent data. While some facts come easily, in the form of specific statements, many start out as mere clues which must be interpreted carefully and drawn out skillfully if the soldier’s full potentialities are to be revealed.
    d.	The successful interview will be terminated in such a way that the person being interviewed will feel that something definite has been accomplished, and that the time spent in conducting the interview has benefited both himself and the Army.
    24.	SPECIALIZED INTERVIEWING.
    For good results, specialized interviewing is de- • sirable whenever possible. This requires that men be interviewed by personnel having similar occupational backgrounds. Specialized selection of interviewers is particularly important when military occupational specialties are to be reviewed, verified, or corrected.
    25.	INITIAL INTERVIEW.
    It is the business of the interviewer who conducts the initial interview to obtain, with the greatest accuracy, information relative to the soldier’s ability, acquired skills and other pertinent data and to record this information on the proper form, W. D., A. G. 0. Form No. 66-1 (Officer’s and Warrant Officer’s Qualification Card), W. D., A. G. 0. Form No. 66-2 (AAF Officer’s Qualification Record), and W. D., A. G. O. Form No. 66-3 (AAF Medical Officer’s Qualification Record) in the case of commissioned personnel, and W. D., A. G. O. Form No. 20 (Soldier’s Qualification Card) in the case of enlisted personnel. Detailed and complete information must be secured and must be recorded on the proper form during the interview, not after the interview has been completed. Preliminary notes should be taken on scratch paper. Even the most practiced interviewer cannot trust his memory and there must be no chance for error.
    26.	REINTERVIEW.
    The objectives of the reinterview vary according to station of the soldier and the kind of information required. For instance, at a replacement training center or its equivalent, the object of the reinterview is usually to check the card for accuracy and to determine the most suitable training assignment for the soldier concerned. Reinterviews are indicated periodically as the soldier changes assignments or for a variety of other reasons. At the reinterview, the conversation is usually so controlled as to secure information to be recorded in only a few items on
    12
    AGO 1027A
    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    specialty. The soldier’s certificate, showing completion of the course, will indicate the name of the course pursued.
    d.	Year Graduated and Rating (if any). Enter the month and year of graduation and the school rating. One of the following academic ratings will be used:
    (1)	Superior— “Sup.”
    (2)	Excellent—"Ex.”
    (3)	Very Satisfactory—"VS.”
    (4)	Satisfactory—"Sat.”
    (5)	Incomplete—"Inc.” This designation will be used for men who, for any reason, do not complete the prescribed course of instruction.
    TM 12-425
    50
    e.	Other Service Schools. Troop, post, and regimental schools will he entered under "Record of current service.” Show dates attended, course pursued, and rating attained.
    f.	U. S. Armed Forces Institute Courses. (1) Upon completion of a course conducted or sponsored by the U. S. Armed Forces Institute, the Commandant of the U. S. Armed Forces Institute, or of the Branch, U. S. Armed Forces Institute concerned, will submit a letter report direct to the student’s immediate commanding officer containing the following information: the institution conducting the course, the number and name of the course, that course has been com-
    Service schools, arm, or service	Number of weeks	Course	Year graduated and rating (if any)
    Sig. C. School	17	Teletypewriter (237)	Aug ’43 Ex
    pleted successfully, and the year of completion of the course. This letter will be noted by the commanding officer and indorsed to the commanding officer of the headquarters where the enlisted man’s WD AGO Form 20 is filed. Upon receipt at the latter headquarters, the information will be transcribed to this form.
    (2)	Entry will be made in this item for such attendance. In the column "Service schools, arm, or service” an entry will be made stating the
    institution conducting the course; in the column "Number of weeks” no entry will be made; in the column "Course” an entry will be made stating the number and name of the course; in the column "Year graduated and school rating” an entry will be made noting that the course had been completed successfully and the year of completion of the course. The following are examples of typical entries on the soldier’s qualification card:
    (22)—(R) Service schools, arm, or service	Number of weeks	Course	Year graduated and rating (if any)
    USAFI			No. H50 Bookkeeping and Accounting	Completed 1944
    University of Wisconsin		Surveying	Completed 1944
    AGO 1027A
    23
    TM 12—425
    50—54
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    (3)	If sufficient space is not available in this section, additional entries may be made in "Remarks.”
    g.	Army Education Program. Reference is made to War Department Readjustment Regula
    tions RR 1-4, Personnel Army Education Program, and subsequent changes. The following is an example of entries to be made on the soldier’s qualification card:
    (22)-(R) Service Schools, arm, or service	Number of weeks	Course	Year graduated and rating (if any)
    A. E. P. Student	45 hrs.	EM 304, Algebra I	1945-Ex.
    A. E. P. On-Job-Training	125 hrs.	Carpenters Helper	1945-Ex.
    A. E. P. Instructor	40 hrs.	EM 300 Review Arith.	1945-V. S.
    51.	ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS.
    Assignment limitations entered in this item are of two general categories, namely, conscientious objectors and men on whom a physical profile serial has been accomplished.
    a. Physical Profile Serial. Physical profile serial will be recorded and dated in this item, for example, 211211, 20 May 44, or 211211, 21 Aug. 44, etc., in accordance with existing instructions. WD AGO Form 20 completed prior to the effective date of the Physical Profile Plan, which shows physical limitations in this item, will not be changed. If a profile is subsequently accomplished for a soldier whose Form 20 already shows physical assignment limitation in nontechnical language, such physical profile serial will also be entered in this item. When deemed advisable for proper assignment or further clarification of the physical profile serial, notation may also be made in this section, in nontechnical language, of the physical limitation indicated by the physical profile serial entered. If space in this item is insufficient, reference will be made to item 28, "Remarks,” and the statement will be continued under that item.
    b. Conscientious Objector. The term "conscientious objector” will he used for enlisted men who are so certified by local selective service boards. Certified conscientious objectors will be assigned to units and installations of the Medical Department only. A man so classified may, at any time, apply in writing to his unit commander for reassignment to a combat unit. This request will be forwarded to his regimental or similar unit commander for approval and, upon such approval,
    reclassification and reassignment may be accomplished in the manner prescribed by AR 615-200. All reference on his records to "conscientious objector” will, in that case, be lined out, with date and initials of the officer making the change and the original request will be forwarded, by indorsement, to The Adjutant General.
    52.	SD (SUSPECTED DISLOYALTY).
    No entry will be made in this item.
    53.	PREFERRED.
    No entry will be made in this item.
    54.	ASSIGNMENT RECOMMENDED BY RECEPTION CENTER.
    This entry will be made by the classifier at the reception center. The classifier will review all the items recorded by the interviewer and make his analysis as to the recommended military occupational assignment in which the new soldier may be potentially or actually qualified. This entry does not necessarily reflect the soldier’s main or second best occupation, but may be based upon background, leadership, hobbies, etc. The classifier will record the TM 12-427 military occupational title and specification serial number. The recommendation for a particular arm or service or for probable leadership may also be entered parenthetically when there are strong reasons for so specifying.
    Examples:
    "Automobile Mechanic—014.”
    "Basic—521 (FA).”
    "Basic—521 (Leadership probable).”
    23A
    AGO 1027A
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    55.	CLASSIFICATION IN MILITARY
    SPECIALTIES.
    As soon as an enlisted man has demonstrated his ability to perform a military job as skilled or semiskilled, or has demonstrated potential ability, the military specialty in which he is considered qualified will be recorded in this item. The practice of failing to give a soldier a military
    TM 12-425
    specialty in accordance with his skill merely because the Table of Organization does not authorize that many or such specialists, or of awarding a military specialty merely to fill a T/O vacancy, is prohibited.
    a.	Designation. Enter the exact TM 12-427 military occupational title of the skill in which the soldier is being classified.
    AGO 1027A
    23B
    TM 12-425
    55
    b.	Spec. Ser. No. Record the TM 12-427 military occupational specification serial number of the title entered.
    c.	Degree of Skill. The soldier’s degree of efficiency in the military occupational specialty will be determined by his company commander or section chief, in collaboration with the unit personnel officer. The three possible ratings which can be entered are:
    (1)	Potential. If he has sufficient familiarity with his tools and equipment and has such aptitudes and qualities as clearly warrants the assumption that he will become qualified as semiskilled or skilled with additional training and experience. Such men should be able to perform the various elements of the job under close supervision.
    (2)	Semiskilled. If he can perform his duties under similar conditions but requires supervision.
    15 Dec 44
    C 1
    (3)	Skilled. If the enlisted man has demonstrated that, given the tools and equipment of his occupation, he can perform all of his duties under sustained field, combat, or operating conditions without supervision beyond that inherent in the job itself. On all issues of the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 containing separate columns for "Potential,” "Semiskilled,” and "Skilled,” this entry will be made by recording the date of determination, in the appropriate column, for example, "10 Sep 43.” In addition, the initials "RTC” will be recorded along with the degree of proficiency, skilled, semiskilled, or potential, in those cases where an MOS is acquired through replacement training center training. (See par. 14c, TM 12-427.) On issues of the qualification card prior to 1 February 1942, a saving of lines can be accomplished by entries as follows:
    Designation	Spec. Ser. No.	Degree of skill	Date of class
    Cook	060	S-SK	SK 4 Apr 43	4 Nov 43 RTC
    The "Date of classification” column may then be used to indicate "Type of equipment,” where applicable.
    d.	Type Of Equipment. The particular
    type of equipment used in the military job in which the soldier has been classified will be entered in this column, when applicable. For example:
    Designation	Spec. Serial No.	Potential	Semiskilled	Skilled	Type of equipment
    Cannoneer	531		3 May 43 RTC		155 MM
    e.	Deletion. Entries will be deleted only when it becomes apparent from actual and reasonable trial that the soldier cannot satisfactorily perform the duties of the specialty either for physical or psychological reasons or because of lack of knowledge or skill. Action for deletion of the military specialty will be initiated by the soldier’s immediate commander as soon as the deficiency becomes apparent. Where deletion is contemplated, the organization commander who recommended the rating will be consulted if possible.
    The deletion will be made by a qualified officer fining through and initialing the entry. Entries will not be removed for disciplinary reasons. When a military occupational specialty is deleted, a reference will be made to "Remarks” and a statement made under "Remarks” stating briefly the reason for the disqualification.
    /. Entries for Service Schools. Upon completion of a specialty at a service school, when, in the opinion of the commandant of the school, the
    24
    AGO 1027A
    TM 12-425
    55-56
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    TEXAS ST-.. E	.‘L xOli
    Li^x^Y
    enlisted man is able to perform the specialty in at least a semiskilled manner, an entry will be made in this item. In addition, the initials "SS” will be recorded along with the degree of proficiency, skilled, semiskilled, in those cases where an MOS is acquired through completion of a service school. (See par. 14c, TM 12-427.) Entries under "Classification in military specialties” will include
    the title of the military classification, the specification serial number of the specialty, the date of graduation, and the type of equipment with which the enlisted man is proficient. Classification as "Skilled” or "Semiskilled” should be approached from the viewpoint of job performance as well as ability or proficiency as a student.
    Example:
    Designation	Spec. Serial No.	Potential	Semiskilled	Skilled	Type of equipment
    Teletypewriter mechanic	239		23 Aug 43 SS		M-14 M-15 M-19
    If, in the opinion of the commandant, the enlisted man is not qualified as skilled or semiskilled, no entry will be made in this item.
    g. Potential NCO. Where a soldier exhibits marked qualities of leadership during the training period, prior to transfer he will be given a military occupational specialty, and an additional entry, "Pot. NCO” will be marked in red ink under the "Degree of skill” columns in this section. For WD AGO Form 20 (1 Feb 1942 edition), the words "Pot. NCO” will be entered in the unused Degree of Skills column; these will ordinarily be the "Potential” and "Semiskilled” columns. For WD AGO Form 20 issued to 1 February 1942, the entry "SK,” "S-SK,” or "Pot.” will be followed by the words "Pot. NCO” written in red ink. For example, if a soldier had been trained in a replacement training center as an automatic rifleman, SSN 746, during training had exhibited marked qualities of leadership, and had been an acting corporal, the entry under the "Classification in military specialties” section would be "Automatic rifleman, 746, Pot. NCO, 10 Feb. 44.”
    56.	REMARKS.
    The space provided under "Remarks” is to be used for supplementary information and facts of value in further explanation and description of other items on the card. Also, certain information is specified for entry therein. If the space in any other item on the card is insufficient to complete information called for, the additional facts are to be recorded under "Remarks.” The usual manner of recording is to print "See 28” in the original item, signifying that reference is made to "Remarks” for further information; then, in "Remarks” immediately preceding the entry, crossreference is made to the original item on the card
    by indicating the number of the item, in parenthesis. While entries should be made in "Remarks” whenever necessary, the space is to be conserved and used in a judicious manner. Start each entry immediately following the preceding one, and do not start each entry on a separate line. All entries will be as brief as possible and will have a direct bearing on the soldier’s qualifications as they relate to military duty assignments.
    a.	Prison Records. Records of confinement in a penal or correctional institution, either prior to or during military service will not be entered on the WD AGO Form 20.
    b.	Religious Preference. No entry indicating religious preference will be made on the WD AGO Form 20.
    c.	Driving Ability and Qualification in Arms. In issues of qualification cards which do not contain specific items for entering driver’s experience and qualification in arms, these items will be reproduced under "Remarks” in the approximate form as shown on 1 April 1943 or later editions of the qualification card. Instructions for making entries in these items are contained in paragraphs 59 and 60.
    d.	Scarce Categories of Specialized Skill. The symbol "(OPS)” will be entered in red ink under "Remarks,” at the reception center, for each soldier considered qualified within one or more of the fields of specialized skill enumerated in current directives on Scarce Categories of Specialized Skill. When the Personnel Placement Questionnaire (WD AGO Forms 0850 and 0850a) have been executed and forwarded in conformity with existing directives, an entry will be made in red ink as: "0850 fwd 2 Feb 44.” The commanding officer of each replacement training center, or other unit, may line out the symbol "OPS” on
    AGO 1027A
    25
    TM 12-425
    56-58
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    Form 20 of individuals whose qualifications are considered not to meet the specifications shown in the current directives on Scarce Categories of Specialized Skill.
    e.	Oversea Service. Dates of departure from and arrival at a port in the United States, or the boundary of the continental United States, will be entered in this item. Example: "Left contl. U. S. 16 Mar 44. Returned 25 Nov 44.” Day of departure and day of return are included.
    /. Six Months of Training for Men under Age 19. Notation will be made under "Remarks” for completion of training equal to six months or more for al] men less than age 19. Example: "Completed trng. equal to 6 mos. or more—7 Oct 45-ABC.”
    57.	RECORD OF CURRENT SERVICE.
    a.	Entries to be made. An entry will be made in this section whenever a soldier—
    (1)	Receives 1 week or more of basic or individual training at a reception center, replacement training center, or unit.
    (2)	Undergoes a permanent change in principal duty. Minor or temporary changes will not be entered.
    (3)	Changes grade. (In order to avoid the necessity of using an additional line for change of grade when such change of grade does not involve change of duty, this may be entered in pencil for the current grade. When a new line is accomplished for any of the other reasons cited herewith, the entry on previous line will be completed in ink.)
    (4)	Is transferred to a new organization, company, unit, or installation.
    (5)	Goes on detached service for over 30 days.
    (6)	Attends a service school.
    (7)	Participates in Army Specialized Training Program. (See sec. VII.)
    (8)	Has been a prisoner of war and returns to the jurisdiction of the United States Army.
    (9)	Is separated from the service.
    b.	Recording. The individual parts of this item will be entered as follows:
    (1)	Date. The date of the change of status will be entered in this column, for example: "4 Feb 44.”
    (2)	Organization and station. For designated Table of Organization units enter only the designa-tior of the company and unit. For numbered nsevice units, detachments and other installations, enter the official designation (and number, if any) of the unit, detachment or installation, and the
    2G
    station to which assigned. Official abbreviations are authorized.
    (3)	Grade. Record the grade held by the enlisted man at the time of the entry.
    (4)	Principal duty. Enter a title descriptive of the general nature of the principal duty, for example: "Truck driver,” "Typist,” etc. Individual training carried on under a Mobilization Training Program will be entered as, for example: "17 Wks Indiv Tng Compl Per MTP 21-2,- 15 Apr 44.” If a specialized training school is attended such information should also be recorded, for example: "Spec Tng Sch (course) Compl (number of weeks) (date).” A duty will not be considered a principal duty until such time as it has been performed for a period of at least 1 month. Entry may be made in pencil.until such time as the duty is determined to be a permanent change of principal duty, at which time it will be completed in ink.
    (5)	Spec. Ser. No. Enter the appropriate TM 12-427 military specification serial number for the principal duty recorded. When entries are made on cards issued prior to 1 September 1943, the specification serial number will be entered after the title of the principal duty.
    (6)	Returned prisoner of war. Record date of capture and "Prisoner of War,” along with the name of the country capturing or holding the enlisted man a prisoner. Example: "6 Jun 1943— Japan—Prisoner of War.” On the next line an entry will be made to indicate the date and the manner in which he returned, such as escaped, exchanged, or repatriated. Entry will also be made for a soldier evading capture or returned after internment in a neutral country.
    (7)	Termination of service. Upon termination of service for any cause, an appropriate entry will be made in this item, showing date of termination and reason therefor, for example: "4 Feb 44— Disch. Conv. of Govt.,” or "2 Jan 44—Commissioned 2d Lt. AUS” or "4 March 44—Killed in action.”
    58.	DATES AND SIGNATURES.
    a. Entries. (1) Date of enlistment or induction. The date of enlistment or induction will be entered at the first interview either by printing, typing or stamping, and will be recorded as, for example, "25 Jan 44.” Cross out either "Induction” or "Enlistment” to eliminate the inapplicable word. In the case of enlisted men of the National Guard inducted into Federal service, record the date of enlist-
    AGO 1027A
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    complete and accurate enough for anyone reading the card to have an adequate understanding of the work performed by the officer.
    d.	Name and Address of Employer. In this space record the name and complete address of the employer.
    e.	Dates Employed and Remuneration. Record the inclusive years of employment after "From” and "To.” Months and days need not be shown unless the employment was for a period of less than 1 year. Under "Monthly salary or income” enter the average monthly wage received.
    /. Specification Serial No. Line out the words "AR 605-95” and enter "TM 12-405” immediately above. Proper code numbers for the work history recorded will be found in TM 12-405. Directions for the use of TM 12-405 are self-contained. The words "Occupational dictionary code” will be lined out. No Occupational Dictionary Code is entered.
    92.	QUALIFICATION IN MILITARY SPECIALTIES.
    The following procedures and minimum qualifications are established and will obtain in designating military occupational specialties:
    a.	Definition. A military occupational specialty is a title applying to a group of related duties and responsibilities normally requiring special knowledge and skills acquired through formal training, experience, or education.
    b.	Purpose. Military occupational specialties are assigned to provide code numbers and titles for recognized military jobs and their qualifications by which officers, commissioned and warrant, may be requisitioned and assigned in accordance with the needs of the Army.
    c.	Awarding Military Occupational Specialty. One or more military occupational specialties may be acquired in one of the following manners:
    (1)	Successful completion of a course in a general or special service school if it has been determined by the training branch or section of the appropriate command, arm, or service that the course qualifies a graduate in a military occupational specialty upon completion thereof and without service on the job.
    (2)	On-the-job training or duty assignment for sufficient time that in the opinion of the rating officer such performance has been at least very
    TM 12-425
    91-92
    satisfactory and that the officer is fully qualified to perform the duties provided for in the specifications. Normally a period of at least 30 days should precede assignment of military occupational specialties under these circumstances.
    (3)	Through civilian experience, when it has been a practical counterpart of the military job, plus such military orientation or indoctrination as is necessary to the satisfactory performance of such job. Normally such period of time should be a miniminn of 30 days. Under such circumstances the assignment of the military occupational specialties must be concurred in by the rating officer.
    Note. The above methods are to be construed as establishing only minimum standards for the assignment of the military occupational specialties, and each major command may establish such additional requirements as it deems necessary and such methods as will assure adherence to these minimum standards.
    d.	Recommendation of Assignment. In order to assure the most appropriate initial assignment of officers, an entry of probable military occupational specialties will be made, with pencil, in this item. Such entry will not constitute a fully qualified designation of the skill but will be considered as a recommendation for assignment purposes only. Pencil entries will not be reported to the Machine Records Unit. When the officer has been found fully qualified, and the military occupational specialty assigned in accordance with c above, the entry will be made in ink and reported to the Machine Records Unit.
    e.	Use of Military Occupational Specialty. The requirements and use of each military occupational specialty, together with identifying code numbers, are listed in TM 12-406 and 12-407. Prompt reporting of military occupational specialty, when assigned, to the Machine Records Unit will serve to utilize fully the knowledge and skills of the officers in the Army.
    f.	Rescission or Removal of the Military Occupational Specialty. Military occupational specialties entered on the WD AGO Form 66-1 may be removed or rescinded by fining out the military occupational specialty. This may be accomplished for the following reasons:
    (1)	When it is obvious that the military occupational specialty is wrong, that is, when neither the officer’s duty assignment record, background, or school record correlates with such military occupa
    AGO 1027A
    37
    TM 12-425
    92-94
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    tional specialty. Rescission in such case shall be made by the current rating officer.
    (2)	When, in the judgment of the rating officer, the officer concerned is no longer qualified for such specialty. In such instances, concurrence in writing must first be obtained from the rating officer’s im. mediate superior or such other authority as may be designated by each of the major commands.
    (3)	When a "Manner of performance” rating of "Unsatisfactory” has been rendered. Such rating shall constitute authority for rescission of the military occupational specialty.
    Note. Rescission or removal of the military occupational specialty will be shown on the Morning Report under "Remarks” ,'nd forwarded to the Machine Records Unit servicing the command. Lined out military occupational specialty will be initialed and dated by the responsible officer.
    g.	Recording. Enter the appropriate TM 12—406 or 12—407 military occupational specialty title in which the officer has been qualified. Record the appropriate TM 12-406 or 12-407 specification serial number and enter the date of qualification. On editions of the WD AGO Form 66-1 issued prior to 1 September 1943, the words "Primary” and "Secondary” are to be lined out and these items combined, and all military occupational specialities will be added to this section in ink, chronologically, as acquired.
    93.	INITIAL INTERVIEW BY.
    Print or type date of interview, and name, grade, and arm or service of the interviewing officer. The signatures of the interviewing officer and of the officer being interviewed will be entered in the appropriate lines. Facsimile signatures will not be used.
    94.	REMARKS.
    This item will be used for further information for which there is either no appropriate space on the card or insufficient room in the space provided. All entries will be as brief as possible and will have a direct bearing on the officer’s qualifications as they relate to military duty assignments. Examples of specific information which should be recorded under this item include:
    a.	Prior Service. Prior enlisted service (other than service school record) or length of service in Army Specialist Corps will be entered, under this item. Example: "EM 5 Yrs.—3 Yrs. Regt Sgt Major—2 Yrs. Rad Opr.”
    b.	Campaign Medals and Ribbons. Campaign medals and ribbons which the officer is authorized to wear will be shown in this item. Example: "Auth: Am. Def. Medal; Am. Theater Ribbon.” Authority to wear service bars will also be shown in this item.
    c.	Religious Preference. Religious preference of the officer will be entered in this item. If the officer’s preference is Protestant, the denomination should be entered, if possible. Examples: "Rel Pref: Catholic” or "Rel Pref: Baptist.” If the officer specifically states that he has no religious preference, enter "Rel Pref: None.”
    d.	Detail to Specific Arms or Services. Entry will be made in this item relative to all details to specific arms or services and the dates thereof. The original entry will indicate the arm or service to which detailed, with the effective date thereof, followed by word "terminated,” allowing sufficient space thereafter for subsequent entry for date of termination of such detail. Example: "Det. FA, 1 May 42, Term.............”
    e.	Certification of Essentiality. When essentiality of the individual has been determined in accordance with the Readjustment Regulations, notation will be made in this item. Example: "Officer determined essential as of (date of determination) under the provisions of RR 1-5, as amended.”
    f.	Close Overhead Fire. Notation will be made in this item, regardless of date of issue of the WD AGO Form 66-1, the first time an individual is subjected to close overhead fire on an infiltration course. Example: "Infiltration Course 10 Jan 44.”
    g.	Requirements For Oversea Service. Other items covered in preparation for oversea service which are not indicated above, as for example, "Chlorine Gas Chamber” may be shown under "Remarks” if deemed essential for completion of the officer’s record. In order to conserve space, these entries may be made without adhering strictly to authorized abbreviations. However, care will be exercised to insure that entry is comprehensible.
    h.	Qualification in Arms. On issues of the WD AGO Form 66-1 issued prior to 1 September 1943, which do not contain a specific item for entering qualification in arms, this item will be reproduced under "Remarks,” in the approximate form as shown on 1 September 1943 or later edi
    38
    AGO 1027A
    TM 12-425
    95-98
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    tions of the qualification card. Instructions for making an entry in this item are contained in paragraph 95.
    i.	Disciplinary Action. No entry will be made concerning any disciplinary action taken against any officer.
    j.	Source of Commission. Information as to the method whereby a commission was obtained other than graduation from officer candidate school, accomplished with individual, crew-served, and combat vehicular weapons. Entries will include—
    a.	Qualification Firing. Note the weapon, course fired, qualification attained, score, and date the individual fires any weapon for qualification.
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score	Date
    Rifle, Ml LMG (cs)	"A” Qu al	s EG	127 218	1 Jul 43 9 Sep 43
    b.	Familiarization or Other Firing. When an officer completes familiarization firing, or when he is transferred prior to completing, or for any other reason fails to complete prescribed qualification or familiarization firing, make one entry for each weapon fired, noting the weapon, course fired (or started), total number of rounds fired, and date when individual fired weapon last.
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score	Date
    Carbine Ml Pistol MG, HB	Fam CS-A		20 rds 15 rds 50 rds	19 Sep 43 20 Oct 43 3 Nov 43
    96.	MAINTENANCE OF W. D., A. G. O. FORM NO. 66-1.
    The commanding officer of the headquarters where the cards are filed is responsible for obtaining and recording all information on officers in his command. It is the responsibility of each officer’s unit commander to transmit to the head
    quarters where the cards are filed, all changes necessary to keep the cards current.
    97.	REMAKING W. D.,
    A G. O. FORM NO. 66-1.
    a.	When it is necessary to remake the qualification cara for any reason other than "Record of service” item being filled, the qualification card will be copied exactly, unless definitu error is discovered in previous entries, together with date of initial interview and date the card was remade. The officer remaking the card will sign as interviewing officer rather than copying the name of the original interviewing officer. If the "Record of service” item becomes filled, the information contained therein will be consolidated and summarized at the discretion of the officer remaking the card. Such information may be consolidated by "Manner of performance” rating when such consolidation will also give a fair indication of the various types of duty performed by the officer. The old card will then be destroyed by the responsible officer.
    b.	Cards of Warrant Officers. Cards of warrant officers who accept commissions or Army Specialist Corps members separated from that Corps for the purpose of accepting a commission in the Army of the United States will not be transmitted to The Adjutant General’s office. In such cases entries in inapplicable items will be lined out and initialed by the officer correcting the card, and necessary changes made. A new W. D., A. G. 0. Form 66-1 may be prepared when the condition of the original card so requires.
    98.	DISPOSITION OF W. D.,
    A. G. O. FORM NO. 66-1.
    a. Initial Assignment. When an officer is initially assigned his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which assigned.
    (1) After the officer has been assigned or transferred to a subordinate unit, the card will be sent to the commanding officer of that unit for his information, after which it will be returned for file. The card will not be rolled, creased, or folded. When forwarded by mail, a heavy protecting envelope of appropriate size, marked, "Do not fold, roll, or crease,” will be used and, when available, cardboard backing will be used as an additional protection.
    AGO 1027A
    39
    TM 12-425
    08
    b. Transfer Within United States. (1) When an individual officer is transferred to another station within the United States, his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which transferred in time to arrive simultaneously with or ahead of the officer.
    (2) When a unit changes station, the qualification cards of the officers assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with the unit records in the custody of the commander of the unit.
    c. Transfer to Oversea Station or From Oversea Station to The United States. (1) When an individual officer is transferred to an oversea station from the United States the commanding general of the port of embarkation through which the officer travels will cause to be prepared an extract of qualification card incorporating items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 15. Extract will be certified by an administrative officer on the port staff. The officer being transferred will sign the extract acknowledging receipt of the original qualification card. The original qualification card will then be delivered to the officer and the extract mailed to The Adjutant General, Washington 25, D. C., marked "Attention, Officers’ Branch, Records Section.”
    (a)	When an individual officer is transferred to an oversea station from the United States and moves either directly to a port of embarkation for transshipment overseas or to a personnel replacement depot for subsequent shipment overseas, he will carry his qualification card with him.
    (b)	When a group of officers are transferred to an oversea station from the same station in the
    14 Jnl 45
    C 4
    United States and move either directly to a port of embarkation for transshipment overseas or to a personnel replacement depot for subsequent shipment overseas, the qualification cards will be placed in the custody of the senior officer for delivery to the proper commander concerned.
    (c)	When an officer is transferred from a replacement depot on a shipment number, his qualification card will be given to the escort officer for delivery to the commanding general of the port of embarkation who will then follow the procedures prescribed in c (1) above.
    (2)	When an individual officer is transferred to the United States from an oversea station, he will carry his qualification card with him. Prior to delivering the card into the custody of the individual, his commanding officer will cause to be prepared an extract of qualification card, incorporating items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 15. The extract will be certified by an officer other than the individual to whom it pertains. The officer being transferred will sign the extract acknowledging receipt of the original card. The original card will then be delivered to the officer and the extract mailed to The Adjutant General, Washington 25, D. C., marked Attention: Officers’ Branch, Records Section.
    (3)	When a unit is moved either to or from an oversea station, the qualification cards of the officers assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with the unit records in the custody of the commander of the unit.
    (4)	When for any reason an officer is returned to the United States from an oversea station, his qualification card will be forwarded as outlined in c (2) or (3) above.
    40
    AGO 1027A
    TM 12-245
    98
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    I* * *111 »y »|»»'» y»* *|W|«jh *y ?ff * > •
    | "*** * t°, JLJI. * ‘	I**' '*	** .TJ.'fffe' ! "~* .^ .L.	/ ’•!
    gte.a. laia ,	,	di |(D-0 |w>-0 |is>-1’- |wi.~ i(»7®	!<•» :	• .]
    _ x»ut sZiMES doHti____________________B__-Ol2W555 J&1LE I R£5 A I 1.	/MSJ&L-U1 ,	_
    fta •	Uast NAMtl	tr.»t< NtMtl	(uioon XMitl	NUMtM HaoanmciI cb»»	.	-j.
    •-•’ ’	j 4 us co cmdr	<<2,,.TL".,"i“^.’.‘."'"""	,s«4 <	**
    I I- I	p*** "******** w~“’»*>,,OATtort«nirJ_AE"It.7..|MO<3gn.SG_p>Tt/£>£F-T3.4»
    ! ... _________________________Q4)*0 GRADE-APPOINTMENTS AMO PROMOTIONS____________________ -
    “ •“ •	*“	Wt£Xln X’m>* V>.»u**pfrK" *■•	»«» LUinUURT CAPTAIN	MAJOR	LT COLON(u	COLONEL I « * W
    	— ruw- tsepxt- j. fsb^	U .• bate tffwin* u rtowrts--------------------------------------------------------------• w
    • “• * j DATE OF RANK IN GRADE	--------------|rws <*~|T3itp ,s" |y-w»f-|-----p----1------------------ -^Jl
    SB. •’	,	(151-0 RECORD OF SERVICE WinwwowL OUTVI _______________	• •
    •	►•» j ttFEorounr UNITnn sTATini”0’* -°A[ES-XX initials type or butt u"ITo?sT*iialT10N -—T—--------initials ; X.;O
    j	OK 51 Al ION	FROM | TO Zea	5TAIJON	FROM	TO mm
    ?*2_ • JJS.127 Ta xne________L^ZAajaZtaTMJlE/ .£/?_____________________________________________________: * •" •
    •	•• • ;b7Vo£Wr Q Add Sln's ScH	__________L________________________________________________ai • ©•<
    Nm . ILjBK-jjQJ..- 127 V InF_P^A_______________________________________________________________________: j.
    8|Oa!._AM...201^ THE.___VsiML^Wesa^llPjAJA_________________________~______________________;*
    •	-• *|~ gEfiX-Afa/,.. HclV TNF_IkfES ____L__l_______—_______________________________________________h *
    *	"** ["'	' ......... ..........................ZZZZZ--------------------------------------------’T«»
    T»«. lEEEEE	ZZZZZZZZ ~ TZZ ZZZZZZ. ZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZ ~	.• •• •
    <	0* I------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------‘-4B*
    ►	■•■I — .	— — j ------------------------ ■ -------------------------------------------j ....
    •	-•■I ------- J— J-.- -I—--------------------------- I I I I t <.-4
    	 (T6>-O SPECIAL SERVICE SCHOOLS	 	 __(17)-Q GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS ___ C • g F"o«»PA|TCSto______________________________________________________________________SCHOOL	COURSE_CO»»»NQ AND CENER»l STAFF SCHOOL I *^.71” */ I ^wtUtl'*^ I *catl«Gt* »
    BEE2- JlLfeiia JUBUt &*’S SaH fICrmNliSRHTlOH ✓] ItwV.’11’	|tu» Ivi.r Item	’•
    ; S|________________________________________________I___ (ti)»O LANGUAGES	! c» 0*
    J |v j	_____■___________________________I ~ "" MM 'O/'i	/	/J	MONTHLY SALARY^ 2 ? £	bX
    I	REMUNERATION	FROM / / C /	TO / /	OR INCOME_$	\\X
    I	SPECIFICATION	77V /2- 4OS~~	I W
    /	serial no.	ar $05-95 vO. ^20	-eecu nAJintw * 1 jMfijrninABY rn rur.	V\
    V~ s	? >f 11 x x x |
    /	4	X X .4 x	4 4 X 4 4 S	4 4 X	X 4 I
    / SF 7	4 Z 2 z 1 o ^SF 7 4 Z2 1 O SF 7	4 2 A O	£
    /	_______HUNDREDS_________________TENS_________UN,TS
    \ 1TOP ROW • <»).»■*'" C'V^'^L2££LI£*TION	BOTTOM ROW ■ (27) SECONDARY CiV OCCUPAT.ON	Z^
    /	(27) - 6) SECONDARY CIVILIAN OCCUPATION
    /	INVESTMENT BROx/k______________________________________ V
    \	BOUGHT SOLO ^TOCXS	BONDS fOR IAID/VIQNAL
    \	CLIENTS. GAVy ADVICE AS	TO INVESTMENTS	h
    /	SECUR/Ti/ TRANSACTIONS-
    ]	H-T-WARe/nC. FIELD blog. CHICAGO, /ll.
    I	MONTHLY SALARY . <9 O*
    / FROM fy /________________TO Z/^/	OR INCOME $	|
    / TM I2-4&S '
    \	AR 605-9 5	nrriTM»y4QAIAL DirXIOM n >»■»*■■ gp t»E
    FIGURE 54. CODING CIVILIAN OCCUPATIONS.
    / ............. ..................................... _________________________________
    /	■________(28) - (l) QUALIFICATION IN MILITARY SPECIALITIES '
    /	______________________O^GNAT.ON	I SPEC. SER,AL NO ~ I DATE	&
    /	^'-r COMDR___________________ V I5dz ' \soct43 f
    / hdjuthnt	zhq	jo Jan 44	t
    I  MILITARY SPECIALTIES
    FIGURE 55. CODING MILITARY SPECIALTIES.
    64	.	AGO 1027A
    TECHNICAL MANUAL
    PERSONNEL CLASSIFICATION
    TM 12-425
    C 5
    Chances 1
    No. 5 J
    WAR DEPARTMENT
    Washington 25, D. C., 20 August 1945
    TM 12-425, 17 June 1944, is changed as follows:
    Remove page 38A (C 1, 15 December 1944) pages 39 and 40 (C 4, 14 July 1945), and Page 40A (C 1, 15 December 1944) and substitute revised pages 39 and 40 herewith.
    [AG 300.7 (8 Aug 45)]
    By order of the Secretary of War:
    Official:
    EDWARD F. WITSELL
    Major General
    Acting The Adjutant General
    G. C. MARSHALL
    Chief of Staff
    Distribution:
    AAF (10); AGF (10); ASF (2) ; Dept (10) ; S Div ASF (1); Tech Sv (2); SvC 10); FC (1) ; Class HI Instls (1); Gen & Sp Sv Sch (5); ASTU (1) ; ASF Tng C (15) ; AGF Repl Tng C (15) ; RC (10) ; A (10); CHQ (10); D (5) except DI (0); R (2) except AAF (0); SBn (3) except AAF (0).
    Refer to FM 21-6 for explanation of distribution formula.
    AGO 1552A—Aug. 656865°—45
    W. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1945
    Wl.SS" •. I7L-4 fc5’C'h’5
    &&SJLQJXHK FOB (Mm

    20 Aug 45 C 5
    tions of the qualification card. Instructions for making an entry in this item are contained in paragraph 95.
    i.	Disciplinary Action. No entry will be made concerning any disciplinary action taken against any officer.
    j.	Source of Commission. Information as to the method whereby a commission was obtained other than graduation from officer candidate school, will be entered concisely in this item. Example: “Grad Sr ROTC Univ of Kansas June 1935 Inf,” “Aptd Spec-Res AUS 1940,” or “Aptd WO (Clfn #20) 3 Jan 1944.”
    k.	Oversea Service. Dates of departure from and arrival at a port in the United States, or the boundary of the continental United States, will be entered in this item. Example: “Left contl. U. S. 16 Mai 44. Returned 25 Nov 44.” Day of departure and day of return are included.
    I.	Reassignment Pursuant to Reclassification Hoard Proceedings. When an officer is reassigned pursuant to recommendations of Reclassification Board based on proceedings covering period for which an unsatisfactory manner of performance rating has been entered on WD AGO Form 66-1, an entry will be made in this item. Example: “Reassigned under par. 17, SO 40, WD, 16 Feb. 44, pursuant recommendation of Reclassification Board.”
    95.	QUALIFICATIONS IN ARMS.
    Entry will be made in this item showing the firing accomplished with individual, crew-served, and combat vehicular weapons. Entries will include—
    a.	Qualification Firing. Note the weapon, course fired, qualification attained, score, and date the individual fires any weapon for qualification.
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score	Date
    Rifle, Ml LMG (cs)	“A” Qual	s EG	127 218	1 Jul 43 9 Sep 43
    b.	Familiarization or Other Firing. When an officer completes familiarization firing, or when he is transferred prior to completing, or for any other reason fails to complete prescribed qualification or familiarization firing, make one entry for each weapon fired, noting the weapon, course fired (or started), total number of rounds fired, and date when individual fired weapon last.
    AGO 1552A
    TM 12-425
    94—98
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score	Date
    Carbine Ml Pistol MG, HB	Fam CS-A		20 rds 15 rds 50 rds	19 Sep 43 20 Oct 43 3 Nov 43
    96.	MAINTENANCE OF WD
    AGO FORM 66-1.
    The commanding officer of the headquarters where the cards are filed is responsible for obtaining and recording all information on officers in his command. It is the responsibility of each officer’s unit commander to transmit to the headquarters where the cards are filed, all changes necessary to keep the cards current.
    97.	REMAKING WD
    AGO FORM 66-1.
    a.	When it is necessary to remake the qualification card for any reason other than “Record of service” item being filled, the qualification card will be copied exactly, unless definite error is discovered in previous entries, together with date of initial interview and date the card was remade. The officer remaking the card will sign as interviewing officer rather than copying the name of the original interviewing officer. If the “Record of service” item becomes filled, the information contained therein will be consolidated and summarized at the discretion of the officer remaking the card. Such information may be consolidated by “Manner of performance” rating when such consolidation will also give a fair indication of the various types of duty performed by the officer. The old card will then be destroyed by the responsible officer.
    b.	Cards of Warrant Officers. Cards of warrant officers who accept commissions or Army Specialist Corps members separated from that Corps for the purpose of accepting a commission in the Army of the United States will not be transmitted to The Adj utant General’s office. In such cases entries in inapplicable items will be lined out and initialed by the officer correcting the card, and necessary changes made. A new WD AGO Form 66-1 may be prepared when the condition of the original card so requires.
    98.	DISPOSITION OF WD
    AGO FORM 66-1.
    a.	Initial Assignment. (1) When an officer
    39
    NTSU LIBRARY
    is initially assigned his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which assigned.
    (2) After the officer has been assigned or transferred to a subordinate unit, the card will be sent to the commanding officer of that unit for his information, after which it will be returned for file. The card will not be rolled, creased, or folded. When forwarded by mail, a heavy protecting envelope of appropriate size, marked, “Do not fold, roll, or crease,” will be used and, when available, cardboard backing will be used as an additional protection.
    b. Transfer Within United States. (1) When an individual officer is transferred to another station within the United States, his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which transferred in time to arrive simultaneously with or ahead of the officer.
    (2) When a unit changes station, the qualification cards of the officers assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with the unit records in the custody of the commander of the unit.
    c. Transfer to Oversea Station or From Oversea Station to The United States. (1) When an individual officer is transferred to an oversea station from the United States the commanding general of the port of embarkation through which the officer travels will cause to be prepared an extract of qualification card incorporating items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 15 Extract will be certified by an administrative officer on the port staff. The officer being transferred will sign the extract acknowledging receipt of the original qualification card. The original qualification card will then be delivered to the officer and the extract mailed to The Adjutant General, Washington 25, D. C., marked “Attention, Officers’ Branch, Records Section.”
    (a)	When an individual officer is transferred to an oversea station from the United States and moves either directly to a port of embarkation for transshipment overseas or to a personnel replacement depot for subsequent shipment overseas, he will carry his qualification card with him.
    (6)	When a group of officers are transferred to an oversea station from the same station in the United States and move either directly to a port of embarkation for transshipment overseas or to a personnel replacement depot for subsequent shipment overseas, the qualification cards will be placed
    in the custody of the senior officer for delivery to the proper commander concerned.
    (c) When an officer is transferred from a replacement depot on a shipment number, his qualification card will be given to the escort officer for delivery to the commanding general of the port of embarkation who will then follow the procedures prescribed in (1) above.
    (2)	When an individual officer is transferred to the United States from an oversea station, he will carry his qualification card with him. Prior to delivering the card into the custody of the individual, his commanding officer will cause to be prepared an extract of qualification card, incorporating items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 15. The extract will be certified by an officer other than the individual to whom it pertains. The officer being transferred will sign the extract acknowledging receipt of the original card. The original card will then be delivered to the officer and the extract mailed to The Adjutant General, Washington 25, D. C., marked Attention: Officers’ Branch, Records Section.
    (3)	When a unit is moved either to or from an oversea station, the qualification cards of the officers assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with the unit records in the custody of the commander of the unit.
    (4)	When for any reason an officer is returned to the United States from an oversea station, his qualification card will be forwarded as outlined in (2) or (3) above.
    d.	Officers will be considered to be traveling individually, regardless of number, whenever they are not assigned or attached to an organization or a provisional unit moving to same destination.
    e.	A component of a division or similar unit, when detached therefrom, will take with it the qualification cards of the officers assigned thereto.
    f.	Completed qualification card for each officer will be forwarded upon transfer except when the transfer is between organizations or installations of the same command and station; for example, between elements of a division. Qualification cards will not be forwarded to general or special service schools unless such officers are to be reassigned at the completion of the course. Where cards are not forwarded, the commandant of the school will furnish a report of the successful or unsuccessful completion of the course; where cards are forwarded the commandant will cause appropriate entries to be made prior to the
    40
    AGO 1552A
    TM 12—425
    08
    20 Aug 45
    C 5
    TM 12-425
    *C 6
    Ch. (p
    311-4 3*5	ijij jiinmiij
    rrmirnnY
    TECHNICAL MANUAL
    PERSONNEL CLASSIFICATION
    Changes!	WAR DEPARTMENT
    No. 6	|	Washington 25, D. C., 31 October 1946
    TM 12-425,17 June 1944, is changed as follows:
    Remove pages 11 and 12 and substitute page 11 and revised page 12 herewith.
    Remove pages 17 and 18 and substitute revised pages 17 and 18 herewith.
    Remove pages 25 and 26 and substitute revised pages 25 and 26, and add new page 26A herewith.
    Remove pages 29 and 30 and substitute revised page 29 and page 30 herewith.
    Remove pages 33 through 40A and substitute page 33, revised pages 34 through 40A, and add new pages 40B through 40H herewith.
    Page 50, figure 22, is rescinded.
    Remove pages 49 and 50 and substitute page 49 and revised page 50 herewith.
    [AG 300.7 (26 Oct 46) ]
    By order of the Secretary of War:
    Official:
    EDWARD F. WITSELL
    Major General The Adjutant General
    DWIGHT D. EISENHOWER
    Chief of Staff
    Distribution:
    AAF (10); AGF (10) ; Dept (10); Tech Sv (2) ; FC (1); Class III Instls (1); Gen & Sp Sv Sch (5); ASTU (1) ;TngC (15); AGF Repl Tng C (15); RC (10) ; A (10); CHQ (10) ; D (5) except D1;R (2) ; SBn (3)
    For explanation of distribution formula, see FM 21-6.
    ♦These changes supersede section VIII, WD Circular 294, 1945; section V, WD Circular 59, 1946; section VIII, WD Circular 63, 1946; section V, WD Circular 115, 1946; section VIII, WD Circular 211, 1946; section VIII, WD Circular 271, 1946; section III, WD Circular 297, 1946; and section VII, WD Circular 307, 1946.
    AGO929A—Nov. 716105°—46-
    -1
    14 Jul 45
    C 4
    serves no useful purpose to permit men to draw comparisons by means of test scores.
    b.	Safeguarding of Test Material. Test materials are restricted, and it is imperative that proper safeguards be maintained. To accomplish this end, cabinets or chests with adequate locking devices will be provided. Testing materials will be locked in such containers at all times when not in actual use. Frequent inventories will be made.
    c.	Disposition of Excess and Useless Testing Material. (1) Whenever a unit or station has on hand damaged, wornout, or obsolete test booklets, scoring keys, answer sheets, etc., such material will be destroyed by shredding or burning at the post where it is located. A commissioned officer will witness the destruction.
    TM 12—425
    20-21
    (2)	Units possessing current test material in excess of their needs will report such excesses to appropriate post publication stockrooms or, if overseas, to appropriate distributing agencies, who, in turn, will report their surpluses to the Adjutant General depot serving them, for instructions as to disposition.
    21.	TEST SUPPLIES.
    Test supplies, including test booklets, answer sheets, scoring keys and manuals, will be secured upon requisitions made to appropriate distributing agencies. For all authorized Army personnel classification tests, distributing agencies are indicated in monthly issues of FM 21-6.
    AGO 929A
    11
    TM 12—425
    22-26
    *
    31 Oct 46
    C 6
    Section V
    INTERVIEWING
    22.	DEFINITION.
    An interview is a planned and controlled conversation, with the objective of securing all possible data from the soldier that will be of value to the service.
    23.	INTERVIEWING TECHNIQUES.
    a.	The Army’s primary interest in the new soldier is: What has he done? What can he probably learn to do? The interviewer must remember that he is gathering actual information, facts, and data pertaining to the soldier. He should open the conversation with something of interest to the soldier that will put him at ease and yet suggest that the Army is interested in him as an individual. The interviewer should be on the alert and evidence interest in the information obtained. He should endeavor to understand the other man’s point of view. He must discount his own bias and cultivate an open mind.
    b.	Successful interviewing is difficult when the soldier is unduly fatigued, frightened, or irritated. Pleasant surroundings, with maximum privacy, are desirable. Ample time should be allowed for the interview, which should be adjusted to the poise and alertness of the soldier. Impatience with slow talkers will often defeat the accuracy of the interview. Questions should be asked in a courteous but businesslike manner, keeping the soldier aware of the definite purpose of the interview. Questions should be worded so they are easily understood. Leading questions should be avoided. Questions which imply a certain answer usually receive that answer.
    c.	The interviewer must get all the pertinent data. While some facts come easily, in the form of specific statements, many start out as mere clues which must be interpreted carefully and drawn out skillfully if the soldier’s full potentialities are to be revealed.
    d.	The successful interview will be terminated in such a way that the person being interviewed will feel that something definite has been accomplished, and that the time spent in conducting the interview has benefited both himself and the Army.
    24.	SPECIALIZED INTERVIEWING.
    For good results, specialized interviewing is desirable whenever possible. This requires that men be interviewed by personnel having similar occupational backgrounds. Specialized selection of interviewers is particularly important when military occupational specialties are to be reviewed, verified, or corrected.
    25.	INITIAL INTERVIEW.
    It is the business of the interviewer who conducts the initial interview to obtain, with the greatest accuracy, information relative to the soldier’s ability, acquired skills and other pertinent data and to record this information on the proper form, WD AGO Form 66-1 (Officer’s and Warrant Officer’s Qualification Card), WD AGO Form 66-2 (AAF Officer’s Qualification Record, and WD AGO Form 66-3 (AAF Medical Officer’s Qualification Record) in the case of commissioned personnel, and WD AGO Form 20 (Soldier’s Qualification Card) in the case of enlisted personnel. Detailed and complete information must be secured and must be recorded on the proper form during the interview, not after the interview has been completed. Preliminary notes should be taken on scratch paper. Even the most practiced interviewer cannot trust his memory and there must be no chance for error. Female personnel will not be used to make initial classification and assignment interviews of male military personnel, but may be used to make subsequent reinterviews.
    26.	REINTERVIEW.
    The objectives of the reinterview vary according to station of the soldier and the kind of information required. For instance, at a replacement training center or its equivalent, the object of the reinterview is usually to check the card for accuracy and to determine the most suitable training assignment for the soldier concerned. Reinterviews are indicated periodically as the soldier changes assignments or for a variety of other reasons. At the reinterview, the conversation is usually so controlled as to secure information to be recorded in only a few items on
    12
    AGO 929A
    *
    31 Oct 46
    C 6
    (c)	Major subject or specialization. Record the name of the course or major subject.
    (d)	Degree and date received. If a diploma or certificate was received, enter the year received. If no diploma or certificate was received, enter the last year of attendance.
    (e)	Vocational training. Vocational training in the Civilian Conservation Corps or medical training in schools set up by religious bodies having scruples against combat military service is also entered under “Trade, night, or business school,” by giving duration of training received, checking whether or not graduated, the school’s name and location, and nature of training and year of completion or last year attended.
    (/) Preinduction training. Civilian agencies have initiated preinduction training programs, based upon War Department recommendations, for the development of skills which have a direct application to military specialists. This training may have been received by the enlisted man in high school, trade school, vocational school, college, or in industry. Results of such training will be recorded under “Trade, night, or business school,” or any unfilled portion of the “Education” section by lining out inappropriate designation. Entry will give duration of training, whether or not completed, where studied, nature of study, and date of completion or last attendance. If the space under “Education” section is insufficient, notation will be made under “Remarks,” in the form of a brief, concise statement as to the nature of such training, for example: “Compl. % yr. Preind. Tng. Radio; 70 Hrs. Electricity.”
    (6) When the interviewer has completed making appropriate entries in the spaces under “Education” he will place a check mark “V” on the code symbol of the school of highest rating from which the enlisted man graduated, regardless of how long or how successfully another school of higher rating was attended. For this purpose schools will be rated as—
    TM 12—125
    36-37
    (a)	Postgraduate.
    (6)	College or university.
    (c)	High school.
    (*»» •»»ciAinr»		......		MnirMTiA^

    DCSIGNATlON
    KlFLEVAM
    CLERK - TYPIST					yz>s"					ihaw
    HCO				SOL			'< JuNll
    													1 ^((.ohooi.m)	//?	f7 7^
    																MCOMO
    															12 DEC
    													STATION		HFCF0T** CEMrt* FT GMtf 4
    															Cp
    (21) REMARKS^-/ SoME MACE	HEFUi/TS.													A CIA,..	4
    yaYEiltaa t/pay cqqr.se. J/Kyx. yy.	MaljMyA FEE														« SOl»l(»		C)
    2* •
    COY
    IMPORTANT UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THIS CARD BE FOLDED. ROLLED. OR CREASED

    b* • z no
    •n
    Figure 2. Sample of completed WD AGO Form 20—Back view.
    20
    AGO 929A
    TM 12-425
    62-65
    17 Jun 4i>
    Section VII
    ARMY SPECIALIZED TRAINING PROGRAM
    62.	GENERAL.
    Various entries on the WD, AGO Form No. 20 have been authorized for the Army Specialized Training Program. Symbols for entries on this form will be found in appendix to TM 12-427. The following instructions will govern in recording these symbols on the WD, AGO Form No. 20.
    63.	TRAINEE SYMROL.
    For all trainees in both basic and advanced curricula, the trainee symbol appropriate to the curriculum in which enrolled will be recorded under “Record of current service.” On Form No. 20 of an edition earlier than the revision of 1 September 1943, the word “Trainee” followed by the appropriate trainee symbol will be recorded as the “Principal duty.” On the revision of 1 September 1943, the word “Trainee” will be recorded as the “Principal duty” and the trainee symbol will be recorded as the “SSN.” When a trainee is transferred to a curriculum other than that in which initially enrolled, an appropriate change will be made under “Record of current service.” When a trainee is graduated from one curriculum and enrolled in another an additional entry under “Record of current service” will be made.
    64.	GRADUATE SYMROL.
    a.	When a trainee is graduated from any curriculum for which there has been provided a graduate symbol, including both basic phase and advanced phase curricula, a thin line will be drawn in pencil through the code previously entered under “Main occupation,” on the WD, AGO Form No. 20, and directly above this code will be entered in pencil the symbol for the curriculum from which graduated.
    b.	An entry will be made in the case of a graduate of a curriculum who is continuing in the program in another curriculum as well as in the case of a graduate who is separated from the program. In the case of the graduate who is continuing in another curriculum, the graduate symbol thus entered will remain unchanged until such time as the trainee is graduated from the curriculum in which continued, when the previous graduate symbol will be erased and the new symbol entered in lieu thereof in the manner indicated in a above. If a graduate who continues in the program in another curriculum is separated from the program prior to graduation from the curriculum in which continued, the symbol previously entered will remain unchanged, except as provided in c below.
    c.	A trainee who is separated from the program prior to graduation for a special assignment based on training received under the Army Specialized Training Program will be considered a graduate of the curriculum in which enrolled when separated, and graduate symbol for the curriculum from which separated will be entered under “Main occupation.”
    d.	Changes made under “Main occupation” in accordance with the foregoing instructions will not be punched on WD, AGO Form No. 20.
    e.	A trainee who is initially assigned to the Army Specialized Training Program in an advanced term will not be considered a graduate of a basic phase curriculum.
    65.
    If the designated space is insufficient for the entry, a notation “see 28” will be made under “Record of current service” or “Main occupation” as the case may be, and the appropriate entry made under “Remarks,” shown as “(29)” or “(13).”
    30
    AGO 929A
    *
    10 Apr 45 C 2
    TM 12—425 76—80
    c.	Over-Age in Grade. A penciled check mark “V” will be entered in this space if the officer’s age places him in a nontroop duty age status. If subsequent promotion places the officer within the troop-duty age limit, the check mark will be removed. Maximum age-in-grade limitations for duty with troop units, other than Army Air Forces, are:
    Colonel_________________________________ 55
    Lieutenant Colonel______________________ 52
    Maj or__________________________________ 47
    Captain_________________________________ 42
    First Lieutenant________________________ 36
    Second Lieutenant_______________________ 36
    Maximum age for assignment of officers of the nonpromotion list services to troop units is 56 years, except that for assignment to the staff of a field army, the maximum is 58 years. An officer will be considered over age-in-grade the day he attains the age prescribed above.
    d.	Retired. Enter a check mark in the space allotted when a retired officer is recalled to active duty.
    77.	SERVICE OR RESIDENCE OUTSIDE CONTINENTAL U. S.
    If the officer has spent at least 3 consecutive months in a foreign country, print the name of the country as it was designated prior to 1935, followed by a notation, in parentheses, of the last year of the service or residence. In the spaces “Years” and “Months” record the years and months opposite the respective countries in which he had service or residence. This item refers to residence or military service prior to the present war and will not include tours of foreign duty after 7 December 1941. If either the word “Service” or “Residence” does not apply, line out the inappropriate word. If an officer has served or resided in more than one country outside the continental United States, enter the name of the last country served or resided in, the date of the termination, and the duration of such service or residence in that country. Cross reference to “Remarks,” if necessary, and there indicate other countries of service or residence and duration of stay in each.
    78.	ENTRY ON EXTENDED ACTIVE DUTY.
    Official orders provided the source for this information. Date of original entry, authority (par. and
    SO No.), issuing headquarters, and date of issuance of the order, are required. If the officer was not continued on extended active duty after the initial period, indicate such break under “Remarks.” This item is not completed for regular army officers. For retired officers, the date of and authority for return to active duty will be indicated in this space.
    79.	GRADE-APPOINTMENTS AND PROMOTIONS.
    Enter the date of the appointment or promotion in which serving currently, in the appropriate rectangle. Any subsequent promotions, whether temporary or permanent, will be entered in like manner. Temporary promotions will be entered in the upper half of the rectangle to allow room for recording the date of permanent promotion to the same grade. The date of rank in grade will be secured from official orders. Dates of appointment or promotion prior to the grade in which an officer is serving at the initiation of his W. D., A. G. 0. Form No. 66-1 may also be entered.
    80.	RECORD OF SERVICE. (Enter principal duty).
    a.	Period Covered. For Regular Army Officers (except retired officers on active duty) the record of service will cover only those principal duties performed since 1 January 1942. For all other officers, including retired officers on active duty, the record of service will cover only those principal duties performed since 1 July 1940.
    b.	When Recorded. Whenever an officer is detailed or assigned to a principal duty, appropriate temporary pencil entry will be made on the first unused line. This temporary entry will be made permanent (entered in ink) under the following conditions:
    (1)	When a principal duty has been performed for a period of at least 1 month, and—
    (a)	There is a change in principal duty.
    (6)	The officer is reassigned.
    (c)	The individual’s immediate superior is reassigned.
    (
    <’ 6
    c.	Post graduate. This pertains only to colleges or universities offering graduate work for advanced degrees. Therefore, nothing will be entered here unless the officer has received a Bachelor’s or equivalent degree from a college or university. Entries under “Postgraduate” will be made in the same manner as for “College or university” above. Combined courses, such as 6-year law courses, leading to two degrees will be entered entirely as college and not postgraduate work.
    88.	TESTS. No tests have, as yet, been authorized for officers. This space will, therefore, be left blank until such time as tests are authorized.
    89.	PARTICIPATING SPORTS.
    The Army is interested only in sports in which the officer was recently active. If the officer only participated and did not excel in any of the named sports, place a check mark “\/” in the blank box. If he coached or excelled, place the check mark “y/” in the box marked “c” or “xl,” beside the particular sport. If he both coached and participated, or coached and excelled, place check mark “y/” in two boxes. Do not check both “Participated” and “Excelled,” because if he excelled he obviously participated. If the officer played on a school, semi-professional, or professional team, the name and location of the team will be indicated, together with the name of the sport in parenthesis above the name and location of the team. Write in any other sport not named, and indicate the degree of participation in the appropriate box. The officer’s ability to coach is of main interest. An officer who excelled should be able either to teach the sport or to supervise activities therein. Other sports may be suggested by the following:
    Archery	La crosse
    Bowling	Polo
    Fencing	Soccer
    Football	Swimming
    Golf	Tennis
    Hockey	Track
    Hunting	Trapshooting
    jiu-jitsu	Wrestling
    90.	ACTIVE HORRIES.
    Check the appropriate rectangle to indicate named hobbies. Only hobbies having military significance
    will be entered in the space “Other; suggested by the following:
    Art and illustration
    Ballistics
    Bird training Camouflage Chemistry Cryptology (codes and ciphers)
    Drafting Electricity
    such as are
    Horse breeding Languages Map making Mathematics Mechanics
    Model making
    Theatrical entertainments
    Woodworking
    Hobbies such as coin collecting, dancing, attending movies, stamp collecting, etc., are not to be recorded.
    91.	MAIN AND SECONDARY CIVILIAN OCCUPATIONS.
    a.	General. These items will not be utilized for regular army officers. In dealing with these important items, take down the complete occupational history by making notes on a scratch pad. These notes are to be carefully checked, verified, and corrected. The best way to secure the information is to cover the most recent employment first; then proceed in reverse chronological order to earlier work. The preliminary discussion will disclose the number of jobs held, years engaged in each, and the average monthly salary. This information will give a broad picture of the officer’s work history so that an interviewer may make a preliminary analysis of the various jobs. A general idea of the type of work the officer has been doing has now been secured. The next step is to get detailed information for the analysis. The fact that these data must be accurate cannot be overemphasized. If the officer has more than one occupation, weigh one factor against another to determine which has more evidence to substantiate its claim as the main occupation. If two jobs compare closely on length of employment, recency, salary, etc., but one requires a higher degree of skill than the other, the more skilled job will ordinarily be the main occupation.
    b.	Title of Your Position or Job. In this space enter a descriptive title of the work history recorded.
    c.	Explain What You Did. Record this information in a brief manner. Be sure that it is
    4OB
    AGO 929A
    complete and accurate enough for anyone reading the card to have an adequate understanding of the work performed by the officer.
    d.	Name and Address of Employer. In this space record the name and complete address of the employer.
    e.	Dates Employed and Remuneration. Record the inclusive years of employment after “From” and “To.” Months and days need not be shown unless the employment was for a period of less than 1 year. Under “Monthly salary or income” enter the average monthly wage received.
    /. Specification Serial No. Line out the words “AR 605—95” and enter “TM 12—405” immediately above. Proper code numbers for the work history recorded will be found in TM 12-405. Directions for the use of TM 12-405 are self-contained. The words “Occupational dictionary code” will be lined out. No Occupational Dictionary Code is entered.
    92.	QUALIFICATION IN MILITARY SPECIALTIES.
    The following procedures and minimum qualifications are established and will obtain in designating military occupational specialties:
    a.	Definition. A military occupational specialty is a title applying to a group of related duties and responsibilities normally requiring special knowledge and skills acquired through formal training, experience, or education.
    b.	Purpose. Military occupational specialties are assigned to provide code numbers and titles for recognized military jobs and their qualifications by which officers, commissioned and warrant, may be requisitioned and assigned in accordance with the needs of the Army.
    c.	Awarding Military Occupational Specialty. One or more military occupational specialties may be acquired in one of the following manners:
    (1)	Successful completion of a course in a general or special service school if it has been determined by the training branch or section of the appropriate command, arm, or service that the course qualifies a graduate in a military occupational specialty upon completion thereof and without service on the job.
    (2)	On-the-job training or duty assignment for sufficient time that in the opinion of the rating officer
    such performance has been at least very satisfactory and that the officer is fully qualified to perform the duties provided for in the specifications. Normally a period of at least 30 days should precede assignment of military occupational specialties under these circumstances.
    (3)	Through civilian experience, when it has been a practical counterpart of the military job, plus such military orientation or indoctrination as is necessary to the satisfactory performance of such job. Normally such period of time should be a minimum of 30 days. Under such circumstances the assignment of the military occupational specialties must be concurred in by the rating officer.
    Note.—The above methods are to be construed as establishing only minimum standards for the assignment of the military occupational specialties, and each major command may establish such additional requirements as it deems necessary and such methods as will assure adherence to these minimum standards.
    d.	Recommendation of Assignment. In order to assure the most appropriate initial assignment of officers, an entry of probable military occupational specialties will be made, with pencil, in this item. Such entry will not constitute a fully qualified designation of the skill but will be considered as a recommendation for assignment purposes only. Pencil entries will not be reported to the Machine Records Unit. When the officer has been found fully qualified, and the military occupational specialty assigned in accordance with c above, the entry will be made in ink and reported to the Machine Records Unit.
    e.	Use of Military Occupational Specialty. The requirements and use of each military occupational specialty, together with identifying code numbers, are listed in TM 12-406 and 12^107. Prompt reporting of military occupational specialty, when assigned, to the Machine Records Unit will serve to utilize fully the knowledge and skills of the officers in the Army.
    /. Rescission or Removal of the Military Occupational Specialty. Military occupational specialties entered on the WD AGO Form 66-1 may be removed or rescinded by lining out the military occupational specialty. This may be accomplished for the following reasons:
    (1	) When it is obvious that the military occupational specialty is wrong, that is, when neither the officer’s duty assignment record, background, or school record correlates with such military occupa
    AGO 9ZVA
    4OC
    TM 12—425
    92-94
    tional specialty. Rescission in such case shall be made by the current rating officer.
    (2	) When, in the judgment of the rating officer, the officer concerned is no longer qualified for such specialty. In such instances, concurrence in writing must first be obtained from the rating officer’s immediate superior or such other authority as may be designated by each of the major commands.
    (3	) When a “Manner of performance” rating of “Unsatisfactory” has been rendered. Such rating shall constitute authority for rescission of the military occupational specialty.
    Note. Rescission or removal of the military occupational specialty will be shown on the Morning Report under “Remarks” and forwarded to the Machine Records Unit servicing the command. Lined out military occupational specialty will be initialed and dated by the responsible officer.
    g. Recording. Enter the appropriate TM 12-406 or 12-407 military occupational specialty title in which the officer has been qualified. Record the appropriate TM 12^106 or 12-407 specification serial number and enter the date of qualification. On editions of the WD AGO Form 66-1 issued prior to 1 September 1943, the words “Primary” and “Secondary” are to be lined out and these items combined, and all military occupational specialties will be added to this section in ink, chronologically, as acquired.
    93.	INITIAL INTERVIEW RY.
    Print or type date of interview, and name, grade, and arm or service of the interviewing officer. The signatures of the interviewing officer and of the officer being interviewed will be entered in the appropriate lines. Facsimile signatures will not be used.
    94.	REMARKS.
    This item will be used for further information for which there is either no appropriate space on the card or insufficient room in the space provided. All entries will be as brief as possible and will have a direct bearing on the officer’s qualifications as they relate to military duty assignments. Examples of specific information which should be recorded under this item include:
    a.	Prior Service. Prior enlisted service (other than service school record) or length of service in Army Specialist Corps will be entered under
    31 Oct
    C 6
    this item. Example: “EM 5 Yrs.—3 Yrs. Regt Sgt Major—2 Yrs. Rad Opr.”
    b.	Campaign Medals and Ribbons. Campaign medals and ribbons which the officer is authorized to wear will be shown in this item. Example: “Auth: Am. Def. Medal; Am. Theater Ribbon.” Authority to wear service bars will also be shown in this item.
    c.	Religious Preference. Religious preference of the officer will be entered in this item. If the officer’s preference is Protestant, the denomination should be entered, if possible. Examples: “Rel Pref: Catholic” or “Rel Pref: Baptist.” If the officer specifically states that he has no religious preference enter “Rel Pref: None.”
    d.	Retail to Specific Arms or Services. Entry will be made in this item relative to all details to specific arms or services and the dates thereof. The original entry will indicate the arm or service to which detailed, with the effective date thereof, followed by word “terminated,” allowing sufficient space thereafter for subsequent entry for date of termination of such detail. Example: “Det. FA. 1 May 42, Term............................”
    e.	Close Overhead Fire. Notation will be made in this item, regardless of date of issue of the WD AGO Form 66-1, the first time an individual is subjected to close overhead fire on an infiltration course. Example: “Infiltration Course 10 Jan 44.”
    /. Requirements For Oversea Service. Other items covered in preparation for oversea service which are not indicated above, as for example, “Chlorine Gas Chamber” may be shown under “Remarks” if deemed essential for completion of the officer’s record. In order to conserve space, these entries may be made without adhering strictly to authorized abbreviations. However, care will be exercised to insure that entry is comprehensible.
    g.	Qualification in Arms. On issues of the WD AGO Form 66-1 issued prior to 1 September 1943, which do not contain a specific item for entering qualification in arms, this item will be reproduced under “Remarks,” in the approximate form as shown on 1 September 1943 or later editions of the qualification card. Instructions for making an entry in this item are contained in paragraph 95.
    4OD
    AGO 929A
    TM 12-425
    94-97
    n Oct 46
    C 6
    h.	Disciplinary Action. No entry will be made concerning any disciplinary action taken against any officer.
    i.	Source of Commission. Information as to the method whereby a commission was obtained other than graduation from officer candidate school, will be entered concisely in this item. Example: “Grad Sr ROTC Univ of Kansas June 1935 Inf,” “Aptd Spec-Res AUS 1940,” or “Aptd WO (Clfn #20) 3 Jan 1944.”
    j.	Oversea Service. Dates of departure from and arrival at a port in the United States, or the boundary of the continental United States, will be entered in this item. Example: “Left contl. U. S. 16 Mar 44. Returned 25 Nov 44.” Dav of departure and day of return are included.
    k.	Reassignment Pursuant to Reclassification Roard Proceedings. When an officer is reassigned pursuant to recommendations of Reclassification Board based on proceedings covering period for which an unsatisfactory manner of performance rating has been entered on WD AGO Form 66-1, an entry will be made in this item. Example: “Reassigned under par. 17, SO 40, WD, 16 Feb 44, pursuant recommendation of Reclassification Board.”
    95.	QUALIFICATIONS IN ARMS.
    Entry will be made in this item showing the firing accomplished with individual, crew-served, and combat vehicular weapons. Entries will include—
    a.	Qualification Firing. Note the weapon, course fired, qualification attained, score, and date the individual fires any weapon for qualification.
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score	Date
    Rifle, Ml	"A”	s	127	1 Jul 43
    LMG (cs)	Qual	EG	218	9 Sep 43
    b.	Familiarization or Other Firing. When an officer completes familiarization firing, or when he is transferred prior to completing, or for any other reason fails to complete prescribed qualification or familiarization firing, make one entry for each weapon fired, noting the weapon, course fired (or started), total number of rounds fired, and date when individual fired weapon last.
    Example:
    QUALIFICATION IN ARMS
    Weapon	Course	Qualified	Score
    Carbine Ml Pistol MG, HB	Fam CS-A		20 rds 15 rds 50 rds	19 Sep 43 20 Oct 43 3 Nov 43
    96.	MAINTENANCE OF WD AGO FORM 66-1.
    The commanding officer of the headquarters where the cards are filed is responsible for obtaining and recording all information on officers in his command. It is the responsibility of each officer’s unit commander to transmit to the headquarters where the cards are filed, all changes necessary to keep the cards current.
    97.	REMAKING WD AGO FORM 66-1.
    a.	When it is necessary to remake the qualification card for any reason other than “Record of service” item being filled, the qualification card will be copied exactly, unless definite error is discovered in previous entries, together with date of initial interview and date the card was remade. The officer remaking the card will sign as interviewing officer rather than copying the name of the original interviewing officer. If the “Record of service” item becomes filled, the information contained therein will be consolidated and summarized at the discretion of the officer remaking the card. Such information may be consolidated by “Manner of performance” rating when such consolidation will also give a fair indication of the various types of duty performed by the officer. The old card will then be destroyed by the responsible officer.
    b.	Cards of Warrant Officers. Cards of warrant officers who accept commissions or Army Specialist Corps members separated from that Corps for the purpose of accepting a commission in the Army of the United States will not be transmitted to The Adjutant General’s office. In such cases entries in inapplicable items will be lined out and initialed by the officer correcting the card, and necessary changes made. A new WD AGO Form 66-1 may be prepared when the condition of the original card so requires.
    AGO 929A
    40E
    TM 12-425
    97-98
    c.	Cards for Officers Whose Temporary Appointment as General Officer Has Terminated. (1) A WD AGO Form 66—1, 66—2, or 66—3 (Officer’s and Warrant Officer’s Qualification Card), as appropriate, will be initiated for every general officer when he is reduced to a grade below general grade. The form will be initiated at the station of his new assignment. The date of reversion to present grade and date of rank will be entered in the appropriate space in item 14, Grade—Appointments and Promotions, and the unused portion to the left of this entry will be used for the entry of the time during which he held general grade, as “Brigadier General (Temp.) 20 Jan 1944 to 20 Jan 1946.”
    (2) Unless the officer has had a substantial record of civilian occupation within the 15 years preceding initiation of the form, item 26, Main Civilian Occupation, will bear only the entry “Professional soldier” for the appropriate dates.
    (3) Item 15, Record of Service, need not be itemized in detail. A brief series of entries in chronological order, with approximate dates, will be made of the principal duties performed by the officer, identifying the general nature of the duty performed, as “Asst. CG, —---Division; CG,_______Base
    Section; AC/S, G—3,---------Theater; Deputy
    AC/S, G-4, Ordnance Procurement,” etc. Entries will not normally be made for duties performed for less than 3 months, nor should entries be made for duties on routine boards or committees. Entries should, however, show duty on boards with special functions, such as War Department Manpower Board, Secretary of War’s Separations Board, etc.
    98. DISPOSITION OF WD
    AGO FORM 66—1.
    a. Initial Assignment. (1) When an officer is initially assigned, his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which assigned.
    (2) After the officer has been assigned or transferred to a subordinate unit, the card will be sent to the commanding officer of that unit for his information, after which it will be returned for file. The card will not be rolled, creased, or folded. When forwarded by mail, a heavy protecting envelope of appropriate size, marked, “Do not fold, roll, or crease,” will be used and, when available,
    31 Oct
    C 6
    cardboard backing will be used as an additional protection.
    b. Transfer Within United States. (1) (a) When an individual officer is transferred to another station within the United States, his qualification card will be mailed to the headquarters of the unit to which transferred in time to arrive on or before the effective date of change of morning report and in each case before the arrival of the officer.
    (6) Commanding officers will insure that the WD AGO Form 66—1 on each officer transferred is complete and accurate and that last manner of performance rating, oversea service, physical status, and category statements are entered before the form is forwarded to the next unit.
    (2) When a unit changes station, the qualification cards of the officers assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with the unit records in the custody of the commander of the unit.
    c. Transfer to Oversea Station or From Oversea Station to The United States. (1) When an individual officer is transferred to an oversea station from the United States and moves either directly to a port of embarkation for transshipment overseas or to a personnel replacement depot for subsequent shipment overseas, he will carry his qualification card with him.
    (2)	When a group of officers are transferred to an oversea station from the same station in the United States and move either directly to a port of embarkation for transshipment overseas or to a personnel replacement depot for subsequent shipment overseas, the qualification cards will be placed in the custody of the senior officer for delivery to the proper commander concerned.
    (3)	When an officer is transferred from a replacement depot on a shipment number, his qualification card will be given to the escort officer for delivery to the commanding general of the port of embarkation who will then follow the procedures prescribed above.
    (4)	When an individual officer is transferred to the United States from an oversea station, he will carry his qualification card with him.
    (5)	When a unit is moved either to or from an oversea station, the qualification cards of the officers assigned or attached thereto will be transferred with
    40F
    AGO 929A
    31 Oct 46
    C 6
    the unit records in the custody of the commander of the unit.
    (6)	When for any reason an officer is returned to the United States from an oversea station, his qualification card will be forwarded as outlined in (4) or (5) above.
    d. Officers will be considered to be traveling individually, regardless of number, whenever they are not assigned or attached to an organization or a provisional unit moving to same destination.
    e. A component of a division or similar unit, when detached therefrom, will take with it the qualification cards of the officers assigned thereto.
    /. (1) Completed qualification card for each officer will be forwarded upon transfer except when the transfer is between organizations or installations of the same command and station; for example, between elements of a division.
    (2) Qualification cards will not be forwarded to general or special service schools unless such officers are to be reassigned at the completion of the course.
    (3) Exceptions to the above rule are as follows: The qualification cards of all student personnel,
    TM 12-425
    63
    except Army Air Forces, attending schools of more than 5 months’ duration and of personnel attending the Armed Forces Staff College will be carried forward as follows:
    (a)	For students attending a general or special service school, the qualification card will be forwarded to the school concerned.
    (6)	For students attending a civilian school, the qualification card will be forwarded to the appropriate Army headquarters. However, for officers attending a civilian school in ZI or overseas, prior to reporting to the Military Academy for duty, the qualification card will be forwarded to the appropriate Army headquarters or office of the military attache and a duplicate copy to the U. S. Military Academy.
    (c)	For officers attending foreign schools, the qualification card will be forwarded to CO AG.
    (4) Where cards are not forwarded, the commandant of the school will furnish a report of the successful or unsuccessful completion of the course; where cards are forwarded the commandant will cause appropriate entries to be made prior to the
    AGO 929A
    40G
    40H
    AGO 929A
    TM 12-425
    98
    31 Oct 46 4
    C 6
    • • •	• •	«• o^oo	• • Vo • • WV®Ve • V W » VT" *
    I ”"** »* ” ” ” 7 V f: «’°c	•• »■	7', ” <’’» ;• ,'„7. p. T ;* ” ” " sf	2 1 ° sf ■> * » •	°J
    ti	__ltoI^j^7ifiH»F»OlF~T7H~or BUT, II ---LT) col  - lull 7.7 "I 1 ———* *	TtN* ,___UNIT*___H “ O
    BbkA	/ DfaS	-----------~	"	U '	----l-PJ^Pg |	ll( 12) £<1.0)_U_<©) If U), COMPONENT ||	J3)_ARM OR SFWVICf-~7/	* "
    o u;U	.	(2)	(3)-®	1(4)-®	1(5) ft. i ,H |(6)L...	|(7)T® ’	1(8)	<' k A
    dj	i7	.*
    AHBBK (“)•©	years months arm or service combat on admin duty ||(11).(g)	—TPEdR j/l S/P*J) - ~	ll ■	”
    ’lfr“	WAR SERVICE	_	_	~	ASSIGNMENT	./	'	-A^,, OVERAGE	I
    A A I	I 3 TflP-StfT CO/A0AT ||LIM!T^NSJ_HYSICAL±_AUTHORlTY4JB__^g(/ /f6~? /OOCT^, IN GRApfuZ RETIRED_|=	“•
    •	’• ’	~-- ■ '	1	- ,	'	—. . .	- ■■ Il (12) -® SERVICE OR	-	.
    (18)-®	2£*"s months SERV com,_TYRA duty_I RESIDENCE OUTSIDE	CrCOAE/lA/V	”	0""'*"*" ** “'* *F"Ct*!°'lt,)DATEOF ENTRY / SFP 4 H0,3Jt>DJx£-DATE J
    ------- ——____________	 	(14)~® GRADE—APPOINTMENTS AND PROMOTIONS-S ** ® °“ 0---WARRANT OFFICER	CHIEF l"~ “	I-	——I---------1“----------------------------— "
    __________________ (junior crape) WARRANT OFFICER 2"° LIEUTENANT 1ST LIEUTENANT CAPTAIN	MAJOR	LT. COLONEL COLONEL J C ” date appointed or promoted_7	I SEP ifj	q q	----------------------------g |	I
    DATE OF RANK IN GRADE	V AUG fO TSZP */3	& FEB -----------------------------------~^9
    _______________________________________(15)-® RECORD OF SERVICE (ONLY PRINCIPAL DUTY)__ 0 A • n® r* - TYPE OF DUTY UNIT. ORGANIZATION _DATES_nor amitatiam_________________________DATES	dinner I	= —
    OR STATION	FROM I TO -^'“.HALS TYPE OF DUTY UN'T. OKGANIZAWN	\Q ~ INITIALS Q ?	•
    i PA> LDd X37 TN F__I SEP 43	Ei	~ I - @ - •
    •__________________________________________________°®° i student O Add ScH icqct jp>! g OEg ^3_______	-t _
    -____________________________i Abd 121 Vi TNF____________dDEe^^rlAN^SUP ^	----------------------; i “ *22
    •-----------------n • N 3 i A -----^ol TN F-IddMi H4 |tLEEfiJfU&Z^d4Zli	2 “
    I J?fgr 4DJ So/vr TnF ILFE8W__________________------------------------------- ----------------------I
    ---------------—----------------------------------
    •	-----------------------------------------------------------------------------8----------------------------. ..
    5 ® «	—	'■-----------------------------------------------------
    	----------- 2 “ • O0 o	I------------------------------------------------
    -	_____________________________________2___________________E ”?	------------------• 1 I_______________-----______________________________
    _ ' -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*
    V *	* 0	”— ---------------
    •	. DATES , <16):®SPEC.AL SERVICE SCHOOLS____ J	(17) ■ Q GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS '
    _ FROM I to ______SCHOOL___________COURSE	Esutt ?i|ML COMMAND AND GENERAL STAFF SCHOOL ARMY war army ihoustrial naval war ~	" ®”
    i	. _	---XLS. 212----- COLLEGE	COLLEGE	COLLFGF «
    Adj ntn’s Sc.hi M/rwisTRfmGM	------------------~8
    2----------------------------------------I------------------------------------------- (18). © LANGUAGES	? fc
    _________   —- -	----------- SrAWI8H FREKCH GERMAN CHINESE RUSSIAN JAPANESE OTMER	n ? _________™------------------------------------------------:	lAMaklaL	I	; ’ _________............7721!------------------------------------ UIHE Sans	 I_____________________ TRANSLATE--------------------------I.—— _ e	I	———
    --- (.VIA) HA... HO 14,.......(|t)|l	• .LMOM. PR,	'|| „,.	r '
    * *1*........................baa*	I * *
    Figure 3. Sample of completed JFD AGO Form 66-1, front view.
    TM 12—425
    1O1
    17 Jun 44
    tain the code number corresponding to these letters, and write the code number just above the printed word “Name.” The appropriate holes of the name code will then be marked, bearing in mind that this is a sequence code. (See fig. 18.)
    (2) Marital status (top edge). Consists of two direct codes. In the section “Marital status” on the face of the card, entries indicate marital status as follows: M—married; S—single; D—divorced; W—widower; and the number of dependents, if any. The code clerk marks hole 38, “Mrd.,” for the entry “M” only, and hole 39, “Dep.” for entry of any number of dependents. “Single” is not coded. Example: Entry is “S” and for dependents is “2.” Code clerk does not mark hole 38, “Mrd,” but does mark hole 39, “Dep.” (See fig. 19.)
    dicating the highest level of education. This coding specifically designates the holes to be marked. Thus “1-2” at the left of “College or university” means that holes 1 and 2 in the Education code section are to be marked. Since only one level of education can be marked, the interviewer indicates the one to be coded by a check mark through the proper code symbol. The designations “L-7” and “L-ll” in the rectangles for non-English and Illiterate mean that hole 7 and hole 11 in the Education code section on the left edge of the card are to be marked if a check mark is placed in the respective rectangle. These are direct codes. (See fig. 20.)
    (4) Languages (bottom edge). Contains five direct codes. Under “Languages” on the face of the card, check marks indicate the enlisted man’s ability
    €AR1TAL STATUS—S---------------------------NUMBER OF DEPENDENTS-------2__LJl	> f I’
    , r. I TI I ■ ■	CEP. MRD.
    Figure 19. Coding marital status.
    (3) Education (left edge). Contains one code
    to speak, read, or write languages other than English
    field, six holes. Under “Education” on the face of the card, spaces are provided for non-English speaking in the rectangle “non-E, L-7”; illiterate, in the rectangle “L-ll”; in space designated “School,” entries on appropriate line show details of schooling. The entry to be coded is indicated by a check mark (\Z) through the coding at the left of the line in-
    and indicate whether the language is known fluently or just fairly well. In the edition of 1 February 1942, and subsequent editions, rectangles have been added to indicate whether a foreign language can be spoken, read, or written, but the coding has not been changed. The code symbols printed under each of the languages and under “Fluently” designate the

    	0 SF 11	4	*2	7 tLLIT	NONE	(G) EDUCATION	(8)-® EDUCATION YFAR LEFT SCHOOl						NON-E	|l,7	|	ILLITERATE p, । j
    			SCHOOL	YEARS COM-PLETED	GRAD-UATED		NAME AND LOCATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS ATTENDED	MAJOR SUBJECT OR SPECIALIZATION	DEGREE AND DATE RECEIVED
    					YES	NO
    			(Spn GRAMMAR SCHOOL	3	✓		AWX'flXtf, /44.
    			(SF2) HIGH SCHOOL	4.	✓		CHICAGO, /LL.	ACADEMIC
    			COLLEGE OR 1	UNIVERSITY	4	✓		WATHMSTCM CAllH. CHICAGO, ILL	0UStrJ£SS AOMtNj.	AB 1^35

    Figure 20. Coding education.
    AGO 929A
    49
    TM 12-425
    1O1
    31 Oct 46
    C 6
    \|(9)-® LANGUAGES (CHECK APPROPRIATE SPACES) S-speaks R-reaos	W—WRITES V
    \	SPANISH FRENCH GERMAN -OTHER LANGUAGES (a-38>
    }______________(B-35)___la-36)	18-3 7) CH/N£S£ [
    r	S	R w 5 R Tvv 5 Tr |~vv S Tr	Fvv	| Tr	Tvv
    y FAIRLY WELL
    / FLUENTLY	s	WSRW5RWSR	W	S R	W	¥X
    /		v	S
    >41 1
    09	38	37	$6	35	/$•
    f LU N	OTM	G	F S	Zx^
    ( 9 ) LANGUAGES
    \\v
    Figure 21.
    holes to be marked. Thus, “B-35” under “Spanish’ means to mark hole 35, bottom edge of card, “Languages” code section. (See fig. 21.)
    (5) Army area of enlistment or induction. The army area of men enlisted or inducted on or after 11 June 1946 will be indicated in the code section as follows:
    Code 1 and 2 for First Army Area.
    Code 3 and 5 for Second Army Area.
    Code 4 for Third Army Area.
    Code 8 for Fourth Army Area.
    Code 6 and 7 for Fifth Army Area.
    Code 9 for Sixth Army Area.
    Thus if the entry on the card is “Army Area— First, mark hole 1 and 2 in the code section. If a man enlisted or was inducted in a department or theater, the information will not be coded.
    (6) Qualified sport (left edge). Contains one field with a numerical capacity of nine. One hole,
    Coding languages.
    “XL,” is a direct code to indicate “Excels.” In the edition of 1 February 1942, the title of this section on the face of the card is changed from “Favorite sports” to “Sports in which qualified,” but the coding remains the same. The rectangle opposite each sport and under “Excels” contains the printed code symbol for that item. Thus, the rectangle following “Track” contains the symbol “L-SF-1.” “L” means left edge of card; “SF” and “1” are the holes to be marked in Qualified sport” code section. Check marks are placed in appropriate rectangles by the interviewer. If more than one sport is checked, the interviewer must indicate by double check marks (yV) the sport to be coded, since only one can be coded. “Excels,” however, can be coded with any one of the sports designated. Example: Check mark is placed in rectangle “Excels” and in rectangle “Wrestling.” Code clerk marks holes XL, 7 and 1, since the code number for wrestling is 8. (See fig. 23.)
    U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1946
    50
    AGO 929A
    WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 12-425
    This manual supersedes AR 615-25, 31 July 1942 including 28 November 1942; C 5, 25 September 1943; and Supplement 31 July
    1, 1 September 1942; C 2, 3 November 1942; C 3, 16 November 1942 • C 4
    1!-30m3:N°- »■33 3‘«3»^. iS;J£
    8
    17 Jun 44
    General Electrical and Radio Information Test, TK-1, X-2
    Driver and Automotive Information Test, TK-2, X-l
    Arithmetic Test, EA-3, X-2
    Oral Trade Questions, Volume I, Supplements A and B
    g.	Army Specialized Training Program Tests. Special selection and achievement tests have been constructed for the Army Specialized Training Program; these tests are authorized for this program only.
    17.	INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF TESTS.
    Manuals providing instructions for administering and scoring are furnished for all authorized tests. Additional information will be found in TM 12-260. Qualifying scores of the various tests are set by special directives.
    a.	Induction Station Tests. Procedures for testing at armed forces induction stations are described in. the manual Psychological Examining, A Manual for Induction Stations, 1 February 1943, and apply as amended and supplemented by letter AG 220.01 (23 Mar 44) OC-H-SPGAP, 19 May 1944, subject: "Standards and Procedures for Determining the Minimum Mental Capacities Required for Induction into the Armed Forces,” and subsequent directives.
    b.	Reception Center Tests. The Army General Classification Test and the General Mechanical Aptitude Test will be given to all men except illiterates and non-English speaking men. The Army Radio Code Aptitude Test will be given to all men who receive a standard score of 60 or more on the Army General Classification Test. It is desirable that these tests be given before the interview so that the scores will be available to the interviewer. The Oral Trade Questions will be given by the interviewer when there is a need to check trade knowledge. These tests will be administered in accordance with the instructions contained in volume I of the Oral Trade Questions.
    (1)	In testing enlisted men at reception centers, no man will be excluded from the test by any rough criterion such as completion of the fourth grade. This practice is undesirable in that it presents opportunity for error when men are confused and unaccustomed to their new surroundings. Men who were found to be illiterate at induction stations will not be given the Army General Classification Test or the Mechanical Aptitude Test until near the con-
    TM 12-425
    16_17
    elusion of training in the Special Training Unit. For such men, entry on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 will be made in pencil at the reception center, indicating illiterate or non-English, and Form No. 20 will not be punched for these items. Completion and punching of these items will be done at the conclusion of training in the Special Training Unit.
    (2)	Tests will be given to men only when they are in normal physical or mental condition. The test period will be scheduled for a time of day when men are not likely to be fatigued; it will be neither late in the day nor following hours of strenuous work. Men who are ill or who have just been given inoculations are in no condition to be tested. Unless these precautions are observed, the test does not present a true picture of the man’s normal capabilities. A commissioned officer qualified to conduct tests will be present in the testing room during the administration of each test and will supervise and control test procedure.
    (3)	A standard score of 110 or better on the Army General Classification Test is required for attendance at an officer candidate school. A standard score of 115 or better on the Army General Classification Test is required for participation in the Army Specialized Training Program. This will not be construed to include scores made on 2 abc or other nonlanguage classification tests.
    c.	Special Training Unit Tests. The Army General Classification Test will* be given to all men assigned to Special Training Units near the conclusion of such training, including men tested prior to such assignment. The Mechanical Aptitude Test will be given to all men who are to be forwarded from reception center special training units. Special Training Unit achievement tests will be given as prescribed in pertinent directives and manuals.
    d.	Replacement Training Center Tests. The Clerical Aptitude Test, CA-1, will be given to men being considered for clerical training who have had no clerical experience. The Nonlanguage Test, 2 abc, may be given to men who, by reason of lack of language or literacy skill, are unable to make a valid score on the Army General Classification Test.
    e.	Army Air Forces Installations Tests. These tests will be given as directed in Army Air Forces Manual 35-1, 3 April 1944.
    f.	Women’s Army Corps Test. The testing program of the Women’s Army Corps is conducted in accordance with directives and manuals issued. Classification Test R-l is given to all appli
    9
    TM 12-425
    17-20
    cants for Women’s Army Corps. If a retest is necessary at the recruiting station, the Women’s Classification Test, WCT-2 is used. The Army General Classification Test is given to all members of the Women’s Army Corps at the training centers.
    g.	Army Specialized Training Program Tests. These tests are administered in accordance with monthly directives issued by The Adjutant General.
    I«. RETESTING.
    Readministration of any authorized test will be permitted when in the opinion of the Commanding Officer the ‘original test is considered invalid for any reason. Whenever possible an alternate form of the test should be used. Results of retests will be recorded on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 with date of administration. Alteration of test scores on W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20, without retesting, is regarded as a falsification of official records. Corrections of improper entries should be indicated as such. Tests should not be administered more than twice.
    19.	ARMY GRADES AND STANDARD SCORES.
    The manner of interpreting scores on Army tests has been prescribed in the manuals for administration of such tests. Raw scores, standard scores, and Army grades bear no relation to such concepts as the "IQ” (intelligence quotient), or "MA” (mental age). Results on Army tests will therefore not be interpreted in terms of these concepts. A man’s performance on a test is generally expressed in terms of an Army grade and a standard score. The standard score compares the particular soldier with all the others who have taken the same test. On every test a standard score of 100 indicates average Army performance. Standard scores below 100 are below average; those above 100 are better than average. Often it is not necessary to know the exact position of a soldier’s standard score but merely the broad category into which his score falls. For this purpose standard scores are divided into five broad groups called Army grades. The following discussion of the meaning of Army grades, while based primarily on the Army General Classification Test may be construed to apply, with modifications, to all other tests for which Army grades are given. The grade a man earns on the General Classification Test furnishes a fairly reliable index of his general mental ability, that is, his ability to learn, to follow directions, and to adapt to new and varied situations.
    17 Jun 44
    a.	Grade I includes standard scores of 130 and above. Men in this grade possess a high level of general mental ability. When they possess other necessary characteristics, they are potential officers, warrant officers, and noncommissioned officers. Their ability also makes them potential technical specialists.
    b.	Grade II includes standard scores between 110 and 129. Nearly all of these men are capable of performing the skilled administrative and technical work of the Army. Many of them are potential officers and warrant officers. Men at this level are a primary source for skilled technicians and noncommissioned officers.
    c.	Grade III includes standard scores between 90 and 109. This is the largest group in the Army. These men are of average mental ability and usually have the capacity necessary to perform adequately in such jobs as duty noncommissioned officers, general specialists (radio operators, telephone and telegraph linemen, some clerks and cooks), combat specialists (scouts, mortar gunners, machine gunners, artillerymen), aircrew groundmen, and the like. Some men in this category make excellent noncommissioned officers and technicians.
    d.	Grade IV includes standard scores between 60 and 89. These men are below average in their ability to learn new tasks and somewhat slow in their grasp of situations. Men in this group usually make dependable basic soldiers, may become cooks and bakers, truck drivers, cannoneers, riflemen, semiskilled specialists. Because they learn slowly, they need more supervision in training and duty than the three higher grades. Usually they are not capable of quick, original thinking and initiative in making decisions.
    e.	Grade V includes standard scores of 59 and below. Although these men are very slow learners, and not quick at grasping situations, they can perform adequately on many jobs. With careful supervision and training they will make dependable basic soldiers and may also be used as ammunition handlers, bath attendants, decontaminating equipment operators, laborers, pontooneers, truck drivers, and the like.
    20.	SECURITY OF TESTS.
    ■a. Restricted Nature of Test Scores. The scores and grades received on any of the various tests will not be made public either to individuals or groups. This information will be restricted to administrative uses only. If a man asks for his score or grade he may be told that he received a good score, an average score, or a below average score. It
    10
    17 Jun 44
    serves no useful purpose to permit men to draw comparisons by means of test scores.
    b. Safeguarding of Test Material. Test materials are restricted, and it is imperative that proper safeguards be maintained. To accomplish this end, cabinets or chests with adequate locking devices will be provided. Testing materials will be locked in such containers at all times when not in actual use. Frequent inventories will be made.
    c. Disposition of Excess and Useless Testing Material. (1) Whenever a unit or station has on hand damaged or worn-out test booklets, scoring keys, answer sheets, etc., such material will be destroyed by burning. A commissioned officer will witness the destruction.
    (2)	Obsolete test booklets, answer sheets, scoring keys, will be adequately wrapped and identified on the exterior of the packages, and shipped to the Adjutant General depot servicing the area concerned. A letter will be addressed to the commanding officer of the depot indicating that such material is being shipped and listing specifically the items and quanti-
    TM 12-425
    20-21
    ties. Such materials will be held at the depot for possible reissue upon instructions by the War Department.
    21.	TEST SUPPLIES.
    Test supplies, including test booklets, answer sheets, scoring keys, and manuals, will be secured from the Adjutant General depots for all tests authorized for routine use at induction stations, reception centers, special training units, replacement training centers, and WAC installations, except the following tests:
    Oral Trade Questions.
    Electricity and Radio Information Test, TK-1, X-2.
    Driver and Automotive Information Test, TK-2, X-l.
    Arithmetic Test, EA-3, X-2.
    These tests can be obtained from The Adjutant General, Classification and Replacement Branch. Army Air Forces installation tests can be obtained from the Air Surgeon.
    II
    TM 12-425
    22-26
    17 Jun 4-*
    Section V
    INTERVIEWING
    22.	DEFINITION.
    An interview is a planned and controlled conversation, with the objective of securing all possible data from the soldier that w;ll be of value to the service.
    23.	INTERVIEWING TECHNIQUES.
    a.	The Army’s primary interest in the new soldier is: What has he done? What can he probably learn to do? The interviewer must remember that he is gathering actual information, facts, and data pertaining to the soldier. He should open the conversation with something of interest to the soldier that will put him at ease and yet suggest that the Army is interested in him as an individual. The interviewer should be on the alert and evidence interest in the information obtained. He should endeavor to understand the other man’s point of view. He must discount his own bias and cultivate an open mind.
    b.	Successful interviewing is difficult when the soldier is unduly fatigued, frightened, or irritated. Pleasant surroundings, with maximum privacy, are desirable. Ample time should be allowed for the interview, which should be adjusted to the poise and alertness of the soldier. Impatience with slow talkers will often defeat the accuracy of the interview. Questions should be asked in a courteous but businesslike manner, keeping the soldier aware of the definite purpose of the interview. Questions should be worded so they are easily understood. Leading questions should be avoided. Questions which imply a certain answer usually receive that answer.
    c.	The interviewer must get all the pertinent data. While some facts come easily, in the form of specific statements, many start out as mere clues which must be interpreted carefully and drawn out skillfully if the soldier’s full potentialities are to be revealed.
    d.	The successful interview will be terminated in such a way that the person being interviewed will feel that something definite has been accomplished, and that the time spent in conducting the interview has benefited both himself and the Army.
    21. SPECIALIZED INTERVIEWING.
    For good results, specialized interviewing is desirable whenever possible. This requires that men be interviewed by personnel having similar occupational backgrounds. Specialized selection of interviewers is particularly important when military occupational specialties are to be reviewed, verified, or corrected.
    25. INITIAL INTERVIEW.
    It is the business of the interviewer who conducts the initial interview to obtain, with the greatest accuracy, information relative to the soldier’s ability, acquired skills and other pertinent data and to record this information on the proper form, W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1 (Officer’s and Warrant Officer’s Qualification Card), W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-2 (AAF Officer’s Qualification Record), and W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66—3 (AAF Medical Officer’s Qualification Record) in the case of commissioned personnel, and W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 (Soldier’s Qualification Card) in the case of enlisted personnel. Detailed and complete information must be secured and must be recorded on the proper form during the interview, not after the interview has been completed. Preliminary notes should be taken on scratch paper. Even the most practiced interviewer cannot trust his memory and there must be no chance for error.
    2®. REINTERVIEW.
    The objectives of the reinterview vary according to station of the soldier and the kind of information required. For instance, at a replacement training center or its equivalent, the object of the reinterview is usually to check the card for accuracy and to determine the most suitable training assignment for the soldier concerned. Reinterviews are indicated periodically as the soldier changes assignments or for a variety of other reasons. At the reinterview, the conversation is usually so controlled as to secure information to be recorded in only a few items on
    12
    _ 7 J un 44
    the card, as opposed to the initial interview which seeks information for all items which are required for initial assignment.
    27.	SELECTION OF INTERVIEWERS.
    Personnel in all echelons, selected for training as interviewers, should possess the following qualifications:
    a.	Well above the average intelligence.
    b.	Genuine interest in people.
    c.	Poise and emotional stability.
    d.	Pleasant conversational ability as well as being a good listener.
    e.	Wide occupational background.
    /. Good military bearing and broad military knowledge.
    28.	INTERVIEWERS9 TOOLS.
    The tools employed by interviewers may vary with the kind of personnel being interviewed and the quality and quantity of information to be secured. There are, however, certain tools of the trade, with which every interviewer should be thoroughly familiar.
    a.	TM 12-425. This manual contains information relative to .all phases of classification and will be used at all times as an aid in classification procedures.
    b.	TM 12-426 and 12-427. These manuals, formerly published as AR 615-26, list and describe job requirements of civilian and military occupations for enlisted men. Directions for their use are self-contained.
    c.	Dictionary of Occnpational Titles, Parts I, II, and Supplement. Published by the United States Employment Service, part I contains more than 17,000 different job descriptions. Approximately 8,000 of these have separate and dis
    TM 12-425
    26-28
    tinct code numbers. Part II is an index to part I and the supplement contains job descriptions and other information not contained in part I. Part I of the dictionary contains detailed instructions for its use.
    d.	Oral Trade Questions, Volume I and Supplements A and B. Instances will arise in which the work under discussion will be so unfamiliar to the interviewer that he doubts his ability to judge the skill involved; in other cases there may be suspicion that a man is exaggerating his experience or his training. For this purpose the Oral Trade Questions have been developed on a scientific basis and are considered reliable testing devices in the field which they cover. The wording of the questions is typical of the spoken trade language, and is easily understood by a man familiar with the trade concerned. General instructions pertaining to these tests will be found in Oral Trade Questions, Volume I.
    e.	Interview Aids, Volumes I and II. These are mimeographed materials which consist of additional sets of oral trade test questions which are still in the process of standardization. Some of the material contained in the Interview Aids will eventually be published in Oral Trade Questions, when standardized. The Interview Aids cannot be scored and are not to be entered on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20.
    /. TM 12-465. This manual contains code numbers and titles of officer’s civilian occupations.
    g.	TM 12-466. This manual contains a complete list of officer’s military occupations and job descriptions, together with code numbers and titles.
    h.	TM 12-467. This manual contains an abridged list of officers’ military occupations and job descriptions, together with code numbers and titles.
    13
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    29-30
    Section VI
    SOLDIER’S QUALIFICATION CARD, W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 20
    29.	GENERAL.
    A W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20, Soldier’s Qualification Card, will be initiated and maintained for all men and women, enlisted or inducted in the Army. This qualification card is the basic enlisted classification record. Data entered by trained interviewers and classifiers provide an excellent means of determining the training and duty assignment by which the individual soldier will contribute most to the Army. The body of the card, front and back, contains space for recording all necessary information. Use only the spaces appropriate to the facts which are being recorded. Do not make marks on the outer edges of the card as these are for use in coding and punching. Specific instructions for completing each item on the card are given below. When typists are available, the typing of some or all of the historical items on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20, such as name, height, birthplace of soldier, etc., is authorized. Use of ink eradicator is prohibited. If a correction is made in any item on the Form No. 20 a thin line will be drawn through the erroneous entry and initialed. To show that questions were asked and that there is nothing pertinent to be entered in a particular space or rectangle place a dash "—” beside the main heading of the item. Use check marks "y/” in certain rectangles, when the answer given is "yes” or "no,” indicating the proper information called for. In other spaces or rectangles on the card the information called for must be entered in full. Numerals in parentheses on the soldier’s qualification card, for example "(3),” refer to numbers opposite items on the face of the card and identify appropriate code sections when the item is coded. Letters in circles, for example "(g),” refer to the marginal location of code sections.
    30.	NAME, ARMY SERIAL NUMBER, HEIGHT, WEIGHT, RACE.
    a.	Name. (1) The names will be printed or typed in block capital letters, printing the last name first, the first name and middle initial or initials.
    The abbreviations NMI (no middle initial), IO (initials only), or similar designations will not be used to indicate the use or lack of an initial or initials. Use of middle initial or initials, rather than writing out the entire name, is authorized. If the soldier is a junior, the "Jr” will be entered after the middle initial, for example, "Doe, John J. Jr.” (see AR 345—1). In the case of the Women’s Army Corps, record present last name, first name, maiden last name, and name or names from previous marriages in the order indicated, names from previous marriages being shown in parenthesis, for example: Jones, Hannah Russell (Smith). Soldier’s qualification cards already completed in accordance with previous instructions need not be changed.
    (2) Paratroop volunteers. All men who volunteer as paratroopers will have the entry "Paratroop volunteer” stamped, or printed in red, above "Name” in this item.
    b.	Serial Number. Enter the serial number from accompanying papers, or from the soldier’s identification tags. This number will be recorded as, for example:
    46	539	742
    637	290
    c.	Height and Weight. In recording height and weight, do not repeat "Ft,” "In,” "Lb,” or symbols therefor. Print arabic numerals only.
    d.	Race. Indicate race by printing "W” in block capital letters for enlisted men of white American or European stock. All other entries in this space will be recorded in full. If the man is a Negro or mulatto, enter "Negro.” Distinguish between orientals by entering "Chinese,” "Japanese,” etc., as the case may be. A man whose parental stock is native to India will be distinguished by recording "Oriental Indian.” For an American aborigine record "American Indian.” Examples of groups that will be distinguished are "Mexican,” "Chilean,” "Filipino,” "Eskimo,” "Arabian,” etc. The Army is interested in individuals and in assigning them to training and duty where they will be of most value
    14
    17 Jun 44
    to the service and where they can make their greatest contribution to the war effort; otherwise, it is not concerned with racial interpretations.
    31.	BIRTHPLACE OF SOLDIER.
    a.	Method of Recording. Print the name of the city and state in the United States or the name of the foreign country. The name of the state may be abbreviated. If the soldier knows only the state in which he was born, record "City unknown,” following this entry with the name of the state. If both city and state are unknown, record "City and state unknown,” following this with "U.S.” For a soldier born in a rural area, record his post office address, or, if that is unknown, record the name of the county and the state. If the soldier was born in a foreign country, record only the name of the country as it was known at the time of his birth; when this is not known, record "Foreign country unknown.”
    b.	How Long In Uo S. If the soldier was born in the United States, and has lived here all his life, put a dash "—” in the blank following "How long in U.S.” If he was not born in the United States, ask him how long he has been in this country and enter the number of years he has actually lived in the United States. If the enlisted man was born in the United States- but has lived outside the continental limits of this country for a period of 6 months or more, enter the number of years he actually lived in the United States. A cross reference will be made to "Remarks” and notation made under that item of the country in which he lived, the length and nature of residence, and the years covered, for example: (No. of item being completed) traveled in France and Spain 8 mo., 1935-36. Military service in the United States armed forces outside the continental limits of the United States is not considered foreign residence.
    32.	DATE OF BIRTH.
    Disregard order shown on the Form No. 20 and record date of birth either as, for example: 14 October 1924 or 14 Oct. ’25. Months of the year may be abbreviated by using the first three letters in each case.
    33.	CITIZEN.
    Determine the citizenship status of the soldier, and check the appropriate rectangle. Only one of the three rectangles will be marked. When citizenship status changes, the incorrect entry will be lined out and initialed, a check mark "yj" will be placed in
    TM 12-425
    30-36
    the appropriate rectangle, and a qualifying statement entered, as: "Naturalized 12 Feb 44.”
    34.	MARITAL STATUS.
    Make entries at extreme left of space provided. This will allow space for subsequent change. When changes are reported, incorrect entries will be lined out, initialed, and the new status indicated.
    a.	Method of Recording. Record "S” for single, M for married, "M (Sep)” for married but separated, "D” for divorced or "W” for widow or widower.
    b.	Number of Dependents. Enter the number of dependents in arabic numerals "1, 2, 3,” etc. If a soldier has no dependents, enter a zero "0.” The soldier’s wife is always entered as a dependent, even though she has an independent income. Any person who is dependent, either wholly or partially, upon the soldier for support is to be regarded as a dependent.
    35.	BIRTHPLACE OF FATHER
    AND MOTHER.
    Birthplace of father and birthplace of mother will be shown in the same manner as "Birthplace of soldier.”
    36.	EDUCATION.
    Year Left School. Enter the year the soldier ceased attending school as his principal activity. In the case of part time work or fragmentary schooling', enter the year when the majority of the soldier’s time ceased to be occupied by educational activity.
    b. Non-English and Illiterate. Induction stations determine literacy in English through appropriate tests. Men who fail to meet the qualifying score on the Qualification Test, QT-1 or QT-2, will be considered illiterate in English. For men with such scores, place a check mark "V” in pencil in the appropriate box "Non-English” or "Illiterate,” as applicable. These items will not be punched at the reception center. When a man initially classified as illiterate at an induction station completes training at a special training unit, the pencil entry will be erased, and appropriate entry made and punched. The classification of an enlisted man as literate by the induction station will not thereafter be changed to illiterate.
    c. School. Five types of schools are listed under "Education.” Entries for each of these schools are considered below.
    (1)	Grammar school. This includes grades from
    15
    TM 12-425
    36
    one through eight. For "Years completed” enter number of the highest grade completed, converting the soldier’s statement to the 8-year grammar school system. When recording a part of a school year, use fractions "1^,” "1%,”	etc- Under
    "Graduated” check the appropriate rectangle. Enter only the location of the last grammar school attended—not the name of the school. Make no entry under "Major subject or specialization.” Enter the year eighth grade work was completed under "Degree and date received,” making no entry unless the soldier did complete the work.
    (2)	High school. This includes grades 9 through 12. No distinction will be made between junior and senior high school.
    (a) Years completed—graduated. Enter the number of the highest grade completed, converting the grades to the 4 year high school system. Check the- appropriate column to show whether or not the soldier graduated. Any courses taken at night school or summer school where credit was given toward high school graduation should be entered under "High school.” Night and summer schooling should be converted to day school years.
    (£) Name and locations of institutions attended. Enter only the location (city and State) of the last high school attended.
    (c) Major subject or specialization. The great majority of major subjects studied in high school will be adequately covered by one of four entries: academic, commercial, vocational, or agricultural, or, in the case of members of the Women’s Army Corps, home economics. If a soldier majored in a highly specialized course available in some vocational or technical high schools, record this as, for example, "Drafting,” "Mechanics,” etc.
    (dj Degree and date received. Enter the year graduated from high school. Make no entry unless high school was completed. Equivalents to a high school education, such as the passing of a high school equivalency examination or correspondence courses in high school subjects offered by various colleges should be noted under "High school.”
    (3)	College or university. This entry will include all entries for education received on a college or university level, leading to a Bachelor’s Degree. Graduation from high school or matriculation at a recognized university is required before education may be entered here. Day, night, and correspondence schooling may be recognized as college work provided that the courses would be approved by an accredited university. Junior college will be included as college. Combined courses, such as 6-year law
    17 Jun 44
    courses, leading to two degrees will be entered entirely as college and not postgraduate work.
    (<2) Years completed—graduated. Enter the number of credit years of college work completed regardless of years of enrollment. Under "graduated” place check in the proper square.
    (£) Name and locations of institutions attended. Enter only the name of the institution in which last enrolled, unless it is so little known as to require the location also in order to identify it. If the training received was through night, extension, or correspondence courses, so indicate under "name and location.”
    (c) Major subject or specialization. Enter the name of the course or subject in which the soldier majored or specialized. Abbreviations are authorized.
    (
    SCHOOL
    GRAD-' UATEO
    NON-E.
    ILLITERATE
    (S^n GRAMMAR SCHOOL
    (SF2) HIGH SCHOOL
    fuZ COLLEGE OR UNIVERSITY
    (4-1) POST GRADUATE
    TRADE. NIGHT OR BUSINESS SCHOOL
    Y/fftlOUS TYPES OF /MDUSTP/AL tDR^AfUZATfOMS, Used
    Double EMrRi AMD RAcH/ME PooRfCEEPTMCi SYSTEMS PREPARED TR/AL BALANCES AMO AYA/MTA/MPD CASR
    AMD ACPOuMTS RECEfVADL-E . CERF/E/ED AS CPR.
    /A/ AfO. (F3E -FAZ)________________________
    NAME AND LOCATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS ATTENDED
    3AL.tiW>RE ,MD.
    Baltimore ,md.
    FRENCH
    MAJOR SUBJECT OP
    SPECIALIZATION
    AZ^y
    /7/1

    yoSuTnWn",T °'° Wocv<£0 FOR LARCA FfRAj

    XY7

    FORM NO. 20—FRONT VIEW.
    28
    TM 12-425
    61
    17 Jun 44
    (2) Replacement cards. When a soldier’s qualification card is removed from the file for any purpose, a blue bordered replacement card will be inserted in its place. This card will record the enlisted man’s name, the location of the original card, and the date of its removal from the file. The use of the replacement card is particularly important when qualification cards are removed from the file and kept under consideration for some time pending final disposition.
    c.	Transfer. For each man transferred to or remaining assigned to Enlisted Reserve Corps or Regular Army Reserve, the Form No. 20 will be forwarded to the commanding general of the service command in which is located the place of residence designated by the enlisted man upon his release from active duty.
    d.	Discharge. For each man discharged on Certificate of Disability for Discharge, the Form No.
    20 will be forwarded to the appropriate Veteran’s Administration facility, or area office with the records specified in AR 615-361.
    e.	Missing in Action, etc. Foi each man missing in action, captured by the enemy, absent without leave, retired or discharged to accept commission, the Form No. 20 will be forwarded to The Adjutant General.
    f.	Released. For all other men released from active duty, Form No. 20 will be forwarded to the State Director of Selective Service having jurisdiction over the discharged men. (Parts 5 and 6 of W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 53 (Report of Separation), will be forwarded with W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 in these cases.)
    g.	Deceased. For each man deceased the Form No. 20 will be destroyed 30 days subsequent to the transmittal of an official report of death.
    o
    o
    • o
    (22)-5 SERVICE SCHOOLS. ARM OP SERVICE
    • o
    • If) • £t
    (29) RECORD OF CURRENT SERVICE
    ORGANIZATION ANO STATION
    GRADE
    •EARS
    MO S
    Sasic +SpvAMceo
    COURSE
    (24) SO
    ER
    O
    CKI____I MOTORCYCLE
    -STATE DRIVER S PERMIT
    YEAR GRADUATED AND RATING (IF ANY)
    (3?) QUALIFICATIONS IN ARMS ___ COURSf QUAllfltO
    Pvt cpl
    sHav 11
    CLEMT1PIST
    ADOl-PCO A DAI At CO
    /A Dec iW3
    >SD£cn /fa,Co {fitor 2A/F PPC, T Pa Co /6{ st
    Co /O! st /A/P REGT
    STATION
    o
    SOLDIER
    (31) DRIVES AUTO I holos At a ayland
    m • •
    U) O
    □
    •
    ____WAIft.
    IJmW____
    note: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FILL OUT THIS CARD WITHOUT FIRST READING INSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED IN AR 6’5 25 VERY CAREFULLY
    (21)-® PREVIOUS MILITARY EXPERIENCE
    SEF VICE

    TEARS
    EACH
    H'GHEST GRAPE

    Cart
    Rotc
    3L

    : ~ rrv/Yj-rw rVT rm	<
    145
    502
    NUMBER OF. WEEKS
    (23)-® ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS
    (25) PREFERRED
    O • •
    2 M
    (26)	„
    ASSIGNMENT RECOMMENDED _______-a—/f / Y
    EY RECEPTION CENTER____J
    (27)-®
    llPHAfAAL____
    CJ.EKK-TYPIST Adm- SLCQ----
    MU JOS sot
    Q
    • o (D
    (28) REMARKS	SoATE OAOAfE	____
    /AIFU.TAA T/OAT CODAS £ J AtAA. W,____A/A4-AA1A TMj
    COAfPL£.T-ET> yApPV'l________________________________

    J9S

    IMPORTANT —• UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THIS CARD BE FOLDED, ROLLED. OR CREASED
    FIGURE 2. SAMPLE OF COMPLETED W.D., A.G.O.
    FORM NO. 20—BACK VIEW.
    29
    TM 12-425
    62-65
    17 Jun 44
    Section VII
    ARMY SPECIALIZED TRAINING PROGRAM
    62.	GENERAL.
    Various entries on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20 have been authorized for the Army Specialized Training Program. Symbols for entries on this form will be found in appendix to TM 12-427. The following instructions will govern in recording these symbols on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20.
    63.	TRAINEE SYMBOL.
    For all trainees in both basic and advanced curricula, the trainee symbol appropriate to the curriculum in which enrolled will be recorded under "Record of current service.” On Form No. 20 of an edition earlier than the revision of 1 September 1943, the word "Trainee” followed by the .appropriate trainee symbol will be recorded as the "Principal duty.” On the revision of 1 September 1943, the word "Trainee” will be recorded as the "Principal duty” and the trainee symbol will be recorded as the "SSN.” When a trainee is transferred to a curriculum other than that in which initially enrolled, an appropriate change will be made under "Record of current service.” When a trainee is graduated from one curriculum and enrolled in another an additional entry under "Record of current service” will be made.
    64.	GRADUATE SYMBOL.
    a.	When a trainee is graduated from any curriculum for which there has been provided a graduate symbol, including both basic phase and advanced phase curricula, a thin line will be drawn in pencil through the code previously entered under "Main occupation,” on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20, and directly above this code will be entered in pencil the symbol for the curriculum from which graduated.
    b.	An entry will be made in the case of a gradu
    ate of a curriculum who is continuing in the program in another curriculum as well as in the case of a graduate who is separated from the program. In the case of the graduate who is continuing in another curriculum, the graduate symbol thus entered will remain unchanged until such time as the trainee is graduated from the curriculum in which continued, when the previous graduate symbol will be erased and the new symbol entered in lieu thereof in the manner indicated in a above. If a graduate who continues in the program in another curriculum is separated from the program prior to graduation from the curriculum in which continued, the symbol previously entered will remain unchanged, except as provided in c below.
    c.	A trainee who is separated from the program prior to graduation for a special assignment based on training received under the Army Specialized Training Program will be considered a graduate of the curriculum in which enrolled when separated, and graduate symbol for the curriculum from which separated will be entered under "Main occupation.”
    d.	Changes made under "Main occupation” in accordance with the foregoing instructions will not be punched on W.D., A.G.O. Forms No. 20.
    e.	A trainee who is initially assigned to the Army Specialized Training Program in an advanced term will not be considered a graduate of a basic phase curriculum.
    65.
    If the designated space is insufficient for the entry, a notation "see 28” will be made under "Record of current service” or "Main occupation” as the case may be, and the appropriate entry made under "Remarks,” shown as "(29)” or "(13).”
    30
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    66-68
    Section VIII
    OFFICERS’ AND WARRANT OFFICERS’ CLASSIFICATION
    66.	GENERAL.
    a.	The purpose of classification of commissioned and warrant officers is to obtain the maximum use of their skills, abilities, qualifications, and experience. Since proper classification is the basis for proper assignment, commanding generals, Army Ground Forces, Army Air Forces, Army Service Forces, armies, corps, and all other commanders having assignment jurisdiction thereover, are responsible for the classification of all officers under their command or jurisdiction. A W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1 (Officer’s and Warrant Officer’s Qualification Card) will be initiated and maintained for every commissioned and warrant officer, below the grade of general officer, in the Army Ground and Army Service Forces. W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-2 (AAF Officer’s Qualification Record) will be initiated for all officers in Army Air Forces, except Army Air Forces Medical officers for whom a W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-3 (AAF Medical Officer’s Qualification Record), will be initiated. Detailed directions for filling out W.D., A.G.O. Forms Nos. 66—2 and 66-3, will be found in Army Air Forces Manual 35-1. Classification also will be accomplished for first classmen at the United States Military Academy, senior Reserve Officer’s Training Corps students at recognized colleges and universities, and enlisted students at officer candidate schools prior to being commissioned. Interviewing of commissioned officers will, at all times, be accomplished by qualified commissioned personnel.
    b.	Indicative Entries. To show that questions were asked and that there is nothing pertinent to be entered in a particuar space or rectangle, place a dash "—” beside the main heading of an item. Use check marks "y/” in certain boxes, when the answer given is "yes” or "no,” indicating the proper information called for. In other spaces or rectangles on the card, information called for must be entered in full.
    c.	Recording Results. Numerals in parentheses on the officer’s qualification card, for example, "(3),” refer to numbers opposite items on the
    face of the card and identify appropriate code sections when the item is coded. Letters in circles, for example "(g),” refer to the marginal location of code sections. All entries on the card will be printed in ink or by typewrited, except as otherwise prescribed herein. Punching of W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1 is optional with the commanders concerned.
    d.	Use of Ink Eradicator. Ink eradica-tor will not be used on W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1. If correction is necessary, a thin line will be drawn through the erroneous entry and such correction dated and initialed by the officer authorizing the change. No officer is authorized to change any entries on his own qualification card. If the change is a reclassification due to demonstrated incompetence, a brief authenticated statement relative thereto will be entered under "Remarks.”
    67.	NAME.
    Print or type in block capital letters last name, first name, and middle initial or initials. The abbreviations NMI (no middle initial), IO (initials only), or similar designations will not be used to indicate the use of lack of an initial or initials. Use of the middle initial, rather than printing the middle name in full, is authorized. In the case of a junior “JR,” follows the middle initial, for example: "Mills, Carl J. Jr.” (See AR 345-1.) Officer’s qualification cards already completed in accordance with previous instructions need not be changed.
    68.	SERIAL NUMBER.
    Record complete serial number with the proper prefix. The dash is not to be used after the prefix.
    Examples: N—Army Nurse Corps.............. N 729 924
    O—Officer (Any component of
    Army Air Forces, Army
    Ground Forces, Army Service Forces) ............. O	356 872
    L—WAC Officers......... L 403 033
    W—Warrant Officers............. W2	138 645
    31
    TM 12-425
    69-76
    69.	ARM OR SERVICE.
    Use authorized abbreviations. For officers of the Regular Army, Officers’ Reserve Corps, or National Guard, who are commissioned in an arm or service, record the arm or service in which actually commissioned. For officers who were initially appointed in the Army of the United States, indicate the arm or service to which assigned for duty. For Army of the United States officers not assigned for duty to a specific arm or service enter "AUS” in pencil and, when subsequently assigned to an arm or service, erase pencil entry and substitute proper arm or service in ink. The arm or service for warrant officers will be "None ’ except those appointed as bandmasters or in the Army Mine Planter Service, in which case the . entry will be "Band” or "AMPS.” In the case of chaplains, enter "CH” for arm or service a'nd enter the denomination under "Remarks.” In the case of Women’s Army Corps officers, arm or service will be entered as "WAC.” For officers detailed for duty in other than arm or service to which assigned or transferred, the arm or service in which detailed will be entered in parenthesis in pencil after the basic arm or service. When such detail is discontinued, the designation will be erased. For a detailed list of arms and services see appendix I.
    70.	COMPONENT
    Component will be recorded as follows: Regular Army—RA; Officers’ Reserve Corps—RES; National Guard—NG; Army of the United States—AUS. The component for warrant officers holding a Regular Army warrant is "RA”; for those holding a temporary warrant use "AUS.” The same principles apply to all commissioned women. When officers of the Regular Army, Officers’ Reserve Corps, or National Guard receive a promotion in the AUS, no change will be made in this item.
    71.	HEIGHT AND WEIGHT.
    Enter correct figures to indicate height and weight. Do not repeat "Ft,” "In,” or "Ebs.”
    72.	DATE OF BIRTH.
    Record, in sequence, the digit indicating day of the month, abbreviation of the month, and the year. Do not use a digit to indicate the month. Example: "4 Feb 1904” or "4 Feb 04.”
    73.	RACE.
    Indicate race by printing "W” in block capital letters for officers of white American or European stock. All other entries in this space will be printed out in full. Examples of groups that will be dis
    17 Jun 44
    tinguished are: "Filipino,” "Eskimo,” etc. The Army is interested in individuals and in assigning them to training and duty where they will be of most value to the service and where they can make their greatest contribution; otherwise, it is not concerned with racial interpretations.
    74.	WAR SERVICE.
    Only military service in the First World War between the dates of 6 April 1917 and 11 November 1918 will be entered here. Additional service in an army of occupation and further explanation of enlisted or commissioned service should be entered under "Remarks.”
    a.	Years and Months. Record duration of service in each arm or service, and highest grade or rank attained (enlisted or commissioned).
    b.	Arm or Service. Record authorized abbreviation for the arm or service in which duty was performed.
    c.	Combat or Administrative Duty. Record combat or administrative duty, or both, if appropriate. Combat duty is interpreted to mean all service, regardless of branch, with field troops in training for combat or actually in combat. If officer attended United States Military Academy during the First World War, print "USCC” (for United States Cadet Corps) in "Arm or service” space and "Cadet-USMA” in "Combat or administrative duty” space. Service in Student Army Training Corp "SATC” during the First World War will also be considered as prior military service under this item.
    75.	C.C.C. SERVICE.
    Entries in this item are confined to officers who were on active duty in a military or civilian status. If the officer served in more than one service command or on more than one type of duty, record such data with the period of time in each.
    76.	ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS.
    a.	Physical. If officer is physically limited in assignment, a check mark will be placed in this item.
    b.	Autia®rity. Proper authority for such physical limitation will be recorded in this item, for example, special orders or a certificate from the general hospital disposition board report. Appropriate data relative to assignment limitation will be extracted from the disposition board report or W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 63 (Report of Physical Examination), and entered directly above the words "Physical” and "Authority,” in brief, nontechnical language, for example: "Poor vision” or "Flat feet.”
    32
    TM 12-425
    76-80
    17 Jun 44
    c.	Over-Age in Grade. A penciled check mark "y/” will be entered in this space if the officer’s age places him in a nontroop duty age status. If subsequent promotion places the officer within the troop-duty age limit, the check mark will be removed. Maximum age-in-grade limitations for duty with troop units, other than Army Air Forces, are:
    Colonel ................................. 55
    Lieutenant Colonel	...................... 52
    Major.................................... 47
    Captain ................................  42
    First Lieutenant..’...................... 36
    Second Lieutenant ....................... 36
    Maximum age for assignment	of	officers of the	nonpromotion list services to	troop	units	is 56	years,
    except that for assignment to the staff of a field army, the maximum is 58 years. An officer will be considered over age-in-grade the day he attains the age prescribed above.
    d.	Retired. Enter a check mark in the space allotted when a retired officer is recalled to active duty.
    77.	SERVICE OR RESIDENT OUTSIDE CONTINENTAL U.S.
    If the officer has spent at least 3 consecutive months in a foreign country, print the name of the country as it was designated prior to 1935, followed by a notation, in parenthesis, of the last year of the service or residence. In the spaces "Years” and "Months” record the years and months opposite the respective countries in which he had service or residence. This item refers to residence or military service prior to the present war and will not include tours of foreign duty after 7 December 1941. If either the word "Service” or "Residence” does not apply, line out the inappropriate word. If an officer has served or resided in more than one country outside the continental United States, enter the name of the last country served or resided in, the date of the termination, and the duration of such service or residence in that country. ..Cross reference to "Remarks,” if necessary,. and there indicate other countries of service or residence and duration of stay in each.
    78.	ENTRY ON EXTENDED
    ACTIVE DUTY.
    Official orders provided the source for this information. Date of original entry, authority (par. and SO No.), issuing headquarters, and date of issuance of the order, are required. If the officer was not continued on extended active duty after the initial period, indicate such break under "Remarks.” This
    item is not completed for regular army officers. For retired officers, the date of and authority for return to active duty will be indicated in this space.
    79.	GRADE-APPOINTMENTS AND PROMOTIONS.
    Enter the date of the appointment or promotion in which serving currently, in the appropriate rectangle. Any subsequent promotions, whether temporary or permanent, will be entered in like manner. Temporary promotions will be entered in the upper half of the rectangle to allow room for recording the date of permanent promotion to the same grade. The date of rank in grade will be secured from official orders. Dates of appointment or promotion prior to the grade in which an officer is serving at the initiation of his W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1 may also be entered.
    80.	RECORD OF SERVICE, (only principal duty). In entering the record of service in this item, periods of duty for Regular Army officers (except retired officers) will begin 1 January 1942. For all other officers, including retired officers, duty performed prior to 1 July 1940 will not be recorded. When an officer is detailed or assigned to a principal duty, an entry will be made in pencil in the first vacant line. The penciled entry will later be erased in the event none of the changes in status listed below occur. This entry will be completed in ink, or other entries will be made in ink under the following conditions:
    a.	When a principal duty has been performed for a period of at least 1 month, and—
    (1)	There is a change in principal duty.
    (2)	The officer is reassigned.
    (3)	The reporting officer is reassigned.
    (4)	On 30 June and 31 December of each year, in the event the service is continuous and no entry has been made in the 1 month period immediately preceding.
    (5)	When an efficiency report, other than the required semiannual report on field grade officers, is rendered.
    (6)	When a pool officer, who is attached to an organization, performs specific duties for a period of 30 days or more.
    (7)	When an officer goes on temporary duty for a period of 30 days or longer.
    b.	When a principal duty has been performed for a period of less than I month, and—
    (1)	The service has. been characterized by meritorious performance-of duty or lack thereof.
    (2)	The nature of the principal duties was such as
    33
    TM 12-425
    80
    to be of value in the selection of the officer reported on for a future duty assignment.
    c.	Temporary Duty. An entry is required in this item whenever an officer is on temporary duty, away from his permanent assignment, for a period of 30 days or longer. Example: "Pers. Off.—116th Inf TD Hq 3rd Div—1 Mar 44—15 Apr 44—Ex— Job.”
    d.	Attendance at Refresher Course Schools. Information relative to refresher course schools, attended by pool officers while awaiting definite assignment, will be shown under this item but no "Manner of performance” rating will be given for such attendance.
    e.	Attendance at General or Special Service Schools. An entry is required in this item whenever an officer attends a general or special service school for a period of at least 1 month. The entry will not include a "Manner of performance” rating or initials. Attendance of medical officers at civilian institutions will also be entered if such attendance was while on an active duty status.
    f.	Returned Prisoners of War. Entry will be made under this item whenever an officer has been a prisoner of war and returns to the jurisdiction of the United States Army. Record date of capture and "Prisoner of war,” along with the name of the country capturing or holding the officer a prisoner. Example: "Prisoner of war—Japan—7 Feb 44.” On the next line an entry will be made to indicate the manner in which he returned, such as "Escaped,” "Exchanged,” or ‘'Repatriated.” Entry will also be made for an officer evading capture or returned after internment in a neutral country. Example: "Repatriated—Duty in U.S. only—5 Feb 44.”
    g.	Efficiency Report. When an unsatisfactory manner of performance rating is given, a concise statement will be entered on the next succeeding line stating that an efficiency report has been rendered, and the date such report was rendered. No notation will be made on the W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1 relative to the rendering of an efficiency report except as indicated above.
    h.	Return to United States. When an officer is returned to the United States in accordance with the provisions of War Department Circular No. 58, a statement will be made in the item relative to such return. Example: "Retd. U.S. Per Para........
    W.D. Cir. 58.”
    i.	Final Entry. Final entry will be made in this item, at termination of service, giving cause of termination, and date. Example: "Kd in action— 4 Jan 44” or "Disch conv of govt—3 Feb 44.”
    17 Jun 44
    /. Manner of Recording. The entries in this item will be recorded as follows:
    (1)	Type of duty. The entry in this column will be any descriptive and accepted military designation of a principal duty. If more than one type of duty is performed, care will be exercised to insure that only the principal duty is recorded. Type of duty is defined as follows:
    (> । »»	3B 3 4	3 2	32	2. 3P <1 IB	. p
    °'*'* . . <■ e » ■>	.........	... ... «... ...	....	... »„ ;;; ||,c“,	... .... ...||	....	A
    ii_.	...BP..,.	Bi..,... ...jp-ootBina .... 9. oy.'. ii - — b.i	ii>»> ||	|| —■ 1' hi ..t o........	—gf
    SMB o	-g	X	To)-®	1(4)-® ks).T. । ... |	‘	f(8j I »*
    ___________________________-fj_____/44 R£S 4? I /	,	iaZ	w ®	”	(LAST NAMt) _ (FIRST NAME)_(MIDDLE NAME)_ MBER ARM OR SERVICE COMPONENT HEIGHT	WEIGHT	RACE J
    YEARS M0WTHS arm OR SERVICE_COMBAT OR ADMIN PUTT	f/bO/C V/J/OfV)	’j	’
    " I	13 ,44 - SG-T-	.SmmOirxr/fSf //>ter 43\ j * •
    YEARS MONTHS SRRW COM.)	TYRE DUTY	40	70 J
    c C	-------------- ■ YEARS,MONTHS_?<__ n - — ...
    ** .	~ ,,	' | AUTHORITY: PAR.^._ S O .£ j? . r>
    » =	I I	[■
    9 oft O	WARRANT OFFICER	CHIEF	I ...  ~	S	A JS
    (junior omaoe) warrant OFF!	MAJOR	LT. COLONEL COLONEL x J
    -	----—-------	------—---------------------1?: A
    i---------------	_______________;____' =
    * i =	=======	I
    ^’®	-	___ I o®
    • kA - :	I	DATES	I; ~
    “ 5	7—7——~x. i™-	—---------‘initials “ sOsASB
    s _	_ FROM__to__--------------------J__ FROM	To ,™	’
    1^™® * f	_ S.&444 >atr4J r/r /?./?._________	< * © - © I
    O a® o :	__________4 tr 43 2 O4C 9* ,___________________	: = <■ ®
    . j	_ zg-r rJ> /44	9 4-rc 43	4-4 ff-4_________________________ l[; I
    .5	20/,4,	„ J44 44\/4 4eS49 Uz c.0.3.
    ® "• ”: ,___Z	,77^44 ,	_---- ••	~	-------------1 - O0
    ►’•-I: o®°®
    ®	---------------------------------:------------------------------------1;
    -LL ============= zzzz^zzzz^zz^zzzzzzzzzH1 -•-•I
    ® ®»___________________________________ . _______________________________
    ------------------;----------------------------------------
    I r I '	I I ~T °®°®
    •	"	OATES	iBHBawl	,„„y WA, r	7"! rival «»>	~ 5
    B. TO__________	COLLEGE_COLLEQE	COLLEGE •
    FAtryj ______ _________ /	____ YEAR	[YEAR	[YEAR	Hz M M • I
    _______________■	SP41ISN rnilCN CCRMAI CHHIEIt RUSSIA! MPAUU OTH“"_2 | _______________			<		n ____ ___■■	_______:_urrAf ftXff___________________ 2 " ——I I__________lll	1 ~ I j Pi °>o^
    IMP	»N»A	II ; Ki VI-10 OR ..Ym *!,«* Jo!, mm Bp} MOb’LmEP AV 4%^ 4 ' M j 8 2	" j* ( '	-1	j
    F A MS O I B »	4 F0 It ->«o> •ASaFEClUaVCIlB (	'« F A	IS*A U 1
    ...........	>A® ® ®®k®A® ®i»A®A®	®®A®I«I*1
    0)®4-S
    NAME___
    JoR/V
    04/7932
    (6) LB®
    (7)-®
    (9)-®
    WAR SERVICE
    (10)-®
    SERVICE
    DATE APPOINTED OR PROMOTED
    DATE OF RANK IN GRADE
    TYPE OF DUTY
    04 MJ
    04 MJ R4qr mj
    UNIT. ORGANIZATION OR STATION
    COM0/I t-
    ASSIGNMENT
    LIMITATIONS PHYSICAL-(12) -® SERVICE OR RESIDENCE OUTSIDE CONTINENTAL U S LOCATION	7Z
    (13)ENTRY ON EXTENDED ACTIVE DUTY (.» . n. ... mt. . a u. »■ ornctM QNtr)DATE QF
    (14)-® GRADE—APPOINTMENTS AND PROMOTIONS
    2ND LIEUTENANT
    1ST LIEUTENANT
    (15)-® RECORD OF SERVICE (only principal duty)
    DATES
    INITIALS
    TYPE OF DUTY
    UNIT. ORGANIZATION OR STATION
    (16)-® SPECIAL SERVICE SCHOOLS
    SCHOOL
    COURSE
    IsgyiflM. COMMAND ANDjfENE^AL STAFF SCHOOL
    COURSE
    SPEAK
    WRITE
    TRANSLATE
    OVERAGE I IN GRADE.
    (17)-® GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS
    (18)-® LANGUAGES
    JM£S
    8/W
    40

    jUJWj X//
    aonr/^/fr^r^

    FIGURE 3. SAMPLE OF COMPLETED W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 66-1—FRONT VIEW.
    49
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    98-99
    officers reassignment. Qualification cards of officers on detached service or temporary duty will not be forwarded, unless the period of temporary duty is terminated by assignment. If a manner of performance rating is required where an officer and his qualification card are separated, the entry will be accomplished by the immediate superior of such officer at the installation having custody of the card.
    g. Officers Ordered to General Hospitals. (1) When an officer is ordered to a general hospital, his qualification card (W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1, 66-2 (organization copy), or 66-3 (organization copy)) will be forwarded to the general hospital to which the officer has been ordered.
    (2) Upon release from hospital, the commanding officer of the hospital will dispose of cards as follows:
    (a)	Forwarded to the commanding officer of the pool of his arm or service to which the officer is assigned.
    (b)	In the case of an officer not assigned to a pool, forwarded to the headquarters of the agency cr installation to which the officer is permanently assigned.
    99.	FINAL DISPOSITION OF W.D., A.G.O. FORM 66-1.
    In cases of promotion to grade of brigadier general, relief from active duty, retirement, discharge, dismissal, dropped from the records, death, or other separation from service, the qualification card will be sent direct to The Adjutant General, Washington 25, D. C.
    Z/'C
    toM/g 44
    >8o
    IMPORTANT - UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THIS CARD BE FOLDED. ROLLED OR CREASED
    FIGURE 4. SAMPLE OF COMPLETED W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 66-1—BACK VIEW.
    NOTE: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FILL OUT THIS CARD WITHOUT FIRST BECOMING FAMILIAR WITH AR 605-90
    hi9)-© II MARITAL STATU	AND DEPENDENTS:	SINGLE	MARRIED			DIVORCED		WIDOWER		NUMBER OF DEPENDENTS	2-
    |(20) LEGAL RESIDENCE:	No ft STREET 4-°*	T* R/V&R fctD			CITY			STATE O'""
    l|(2')	namt	AT.	t
    ]ADDRESSEE	STREET ADDRESS &			CiT, VZ«/ "4 OEM	STATE
    !					 (221-© EDUCATION
    I	SCHOOL	NAME OF INSTITUTION	SUBJECT MAJORED IN	degree
    HIGH SCHOOL	4 ^'"{7 CoH/V				'9'7
    COLLEGE OR UNIVERSITY	UH/£g BEtt UAT/V		"Vrg. PEg/Or/oMi	Prf. o	13 Z4
    (23) TESTS
    TEST	|	DATE	| SCORE ||	TEST	|	DATE	| SCORE	TEST	|	DATE	| SCORE |!	TEST	1	DATF	EiCORF
    1	1	II		1	1					 1
    (24)-® participating' sports
    1. BOXING	1	lClXLl 3. BASE BALL	1 I c 1 XL 1 ’'UXhoiin#	[	7.-EQUITATION _	E f C 1 XL	pb pvaipd a us
    2. SOFT BALL	1	1. SJ XL 1 4. BASKET BALL	I 1 C 1 XL 1 6 cmmrIno*	LJSlit]	>. OTHER
    2. PHOTOGRAPHY
    3. RIFLE OR PISTOL SHOOTING
    >BBIES	_	■	,
    5 QTMFR^X/^O^^Z^r
    		 ■■ ■	72T) - ® MAIN CIVILIAN OCCUPATION	(27) -© SECONDARY CIVILIAN OCCUPATION
    POSITION OR JOB	TEACS/EX. /A/TEPA'H77O'Yg9g. T7?J4 £>E	1 /aY'SEstmeMt g/POt-cP
    	THiXrHr VH/f/ous Coverses r" //'t£Eat^t,oa'Y>C-	Boogf'r E/V" S6gO srocrs gavgf	To/? 1
    EXPUII WHAT YOU DIB	KoMWC MMnonV. 'Pciut'AlGTHEoEr or Mrg.	/rr/ggouAc. cg/e/Yrs, 6/>>f /U'rcf -4 s ro
    	nW Dr, Mccown'tY W B/Mx/rc.		'HVEJT^EArE 4VZ>S£CuA/rY nBOMSHCTYaMS
    	ZociHiBiO	A'rH'Yo'?* C/ry	M.77HMPE.'Me. EMc4> ciLDfr ("/caEO ICE
    rimuniVatioL	tro« '9zp to '?4o			FROM /^	.TITLE OF CODE SECTION
    r- I	y	---ITEM NUMBER
    CODE SECTION	*
    cop fdiicatiok! -	/C -ZZ ^INDICATES CODE SECTION IS ON LEFT EDGE OF CARD
    I'-'K t UUk. AI IUIN •'	S
    >	O	---- ■
    N	'————------------’
    u	\
    CATION	NON-E. |L,7	| ILLITERATE |L.,,	|
    YEAR LEFT SCHOOL____________________________.________________________
    iears GRAD- NAME AND LOCATIONS MAJOR SUBJECT DEGREE
    (0	SCHOOL	com. UATED 0F INSTITUTIONS	OR	AND DATE A)
    pleted YESI NQ	ATTENDED	SPECIALIZATION RECEIVED Zp
    (SP1( GRAMMAR SCHOOL	V
    (SF2) HIGH SCHOOL	____________
    n COLLEGE OR
    FIGURE 6. CODE SECTION.
    42
    TM 12-425
    100
    17 Jun 44
    c.	Explanation of Coding Arrangement. (1) Code sections. The holes along the edges of the qualification card are divided into what is termed "code sections.” The title is printed directly underneath the holes comprising the code section. The code sections are also numbered to correspond to the related section in the body of the card. Each section on the face or back of the card which is coded is identified by a circled letter following the number of the section, thus: (8)—[L] Education. The circled letter indicates the edge of the card on which the corresponding code section is located, thus:
    T—Top; B—Bottom; R—Right; L—Left.	(See
    fig. 6.)
    (2) Code fields. Code sections are subdivided into code (or digit) fields, the number of fields in each code section being determined by the maximum number of digits in the symbol to be coded. For example, the code section “Military occupational specialist” (top edge of Form No. 20) requires four code fields providing for the four digits, units, tens, hundreds, and thousands, because the specification serial numbers for military specialists can range from No. 1 up to several thousand. (See fig. 7.)
    eV
    SF 7	4	2	1	0 SF 742	1 OSF 742	1 OSF 742	1	V
    THOUSANDS	HUNDREDS	TENS	UNITS	V
    V
    I II !■■■! I ■!!«■■»■>■*»*■"	11 1	IP »r.——KV
    I (27) " (j) CLASSIFICATION IN MILITARY S PECIALTI	E R IA y	PC^^NTI AL	SKILLED_SKILLED EQUIPMENT
    I '.	' DESIGNATION	4/ NO^ <_
    LIGHT WEAPONS N-C-O- [8/2 3-i-^ 1
    FIGURE 7. CODE FIELDS.
    d. Types of Codes. (1) Direct code. Assigning a specific, independent value to one code position. Example: Highest position of leadership. (See fig. 8.) * 2
    /	<20)	W
    /	Leader-	vv
    /	ship	v\\
    FIGURE 8. DIRECT CODE.
    (2) Numeric codes. they require the use of
    These are so called because
    numerical symbols, or code
    numbers. Use of these code numbers is implemented by the “1-2-4-7 combination.” The two kinds of numeric codes are: Sequence Code and Selective Code. Each of these is discussed in detail below.
    (
    HUNDREDS	I TENS |	UNITS	'	CODE No. 160
    FIGURE 11. USE-. OF CIPHER TO LEFT OF HIGHEST ACTIVE DIGIT.
    45
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    100
    / .1^	^1/
    /	742	8	742	1^
    /	TONS	UNITS	¥?
    \	< 1 ) NAME	'	VX
    FIGURE 12. SEQUENCE CODE SECTION.
    is not possible to select John Doe by use of the "Name” code. (See fig. 12.)
    (c) Selective code. The functions of the selective code are twofold: Direct selection of a specific code number; and sequence sorting. (See fig. 13-) Primarily, the selective code provides for direct selection of a specific code number from a file of cards,
    selecting only those cards coded for the desired number or symbol without disturbing the filing arrangement of the cards not so coded. > Since the primary objective of the coding on the qualification cards is selection of officers or enlisted men with specific qualifications, the selective code predominates. The sequence-sorting feature of the selective code should not be overlooked. It provides a practical and rapid means of sorting the cards into sequence according to such important codes as "Main civilian occupation,” "Military occupational specialty,” and others. The advantage of this provision in the coding arrangement, particularly in connection with preparation of inventories of specialists, cannot be overemphasized. (See figure 14.)
    (3) Only one number can be coded and punched
    1^ S	e ^1 \
    | SF 7	4	2	1	0 SF 7	4	2	1 O SF 7	4	2	1 OSF 7	4	2	> O J Vx
    THOUSANDS	HUNDREDS	TENS	_________, UNITS_____V
    1	(2?) MILITARY OCCUPATIONAL SPECIALIST	4;
    FIGURE 13.	SELECTIVE CODE SECTION.
    C * ■ i « • - -	‘“*1	*
    i , ’«- A • - ■ *	* *' ’	“ r'	’ <■	_______________________
    »	•	*7	IBTSHTORT OF SHtCUlISTS
    •	■ • v*	'
    ,	, ■*'*!	500 th Infantry
    #	*'•*’!	Oats	_______January 1, 1944
    •	~	r <*{	Poat _Fort Jackton,. S. C,
    » » Legend 1 0 = ahortaga	 _
    ,	Company A Company B Company 0 Company D
    :?	? 1:0? "I]TO ? ’'h,j ?|
    :s	■ .	a	?S'si .	8 5J	If!	I s I aS1
    •	a	'	———— —... r    ■ __	.4-..... ..■......i _q-----—।
    . ...	-	*L	2	112.2	— 2	2 —	2 3 1	—
    •	f	<®	1	© ’	1	1	©	1	16	4	1'1'— 2
    056	1	©	1	1	©	1 1	1—	1431
    •	,	060	2	2	—	21	12	42	2 © 21
    ♦	«	096	©	© —	©©	—	©©—©© —	—
    ,	245	6	8	2	6	2	4	6	16	10	18 12 6 1 2.
    *	. >- ->	#	-J 	; ‘ _____-.1—^ _ J—-—"
    e f	e e *■* * e »	r e * * * *	f 9 * * f r / r / 9 * *
    FIGURE 14.	SEQUENCE-SORTING MILITARY OCCUPATION SPECIALTY TO PREPARE INVENTORY OF SPECIALISTS.
    46
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    100
    in a numerical code section, either sequence or selective. For example, although a soldier may have attended a number of service schools, only one of these may be coded in the code section for "Service schools” (right edge of Form No. 20). The reason for this is shown in figure 15.
    In a direct code section, d(l) above, all of the codes can be punched because each position represents a specific value.
    (4) Inner-row coding. The use of inner-row coding simply increases the coding capacity. Inner-row coding is entirely independent of all outer-row codes.
    AM cmi iCTtn mam ljatM,...	NUMBER	YEAR GRADUATED
    AN ENLISTED MAN HAS 1 (22)-®SERVICE SCHOOLS. ARM. OF	COURSE	AND	U
    ATTENDED TWO SERVICE '___OR SERVICE	WEEKS	RATING (IF ANY) V
    SCHOOLS WHOSE CODE? ACTS t SCOTT F'tl.0 /5 4)12 PLANS MtCH	/^43 - 7^-2	/
    NUMBERS ARE I AND J X? C fg j-OWRl/ FIELD £ F/ZC/ZFFT METAL	1*143-83
    A
    IF CODES FOR BOTH SCHOOLS ARE PUNCHED,.........../	|sf 2	1 O SR 7	4	2	1 o
    f	TENS	X. \ UNITS	FN
    (22) SERVICE \cH( lOLS	v\
    CODE No. 4
    W W1FW1FW
    / I SF 2	1 OSF 7	4	2 4I1	° tN
    TENS	X.	UNITS/	F'?
    (22) SERVICE SCH DDL/
    THEN THIS COMBINATION OF NOTCHES COULD ALSO REPRESENT ..................CODE	No. 5
    FIGURE 15. CODE ONLY ONE NUMBER IN A NUMERICAL CODE SECTION.
    It would obviously be impossible to select Code No. 5 without also selecting numbers 1 and 4. The accuracy of sequence sorting would also be destroyed.
    It is accomplished by-using a different style punch which cuts out the space between the inner and outer rows of holes. (See fig. 16.)
    SF 7	4	2 I O SF 7	4	2 I OSF 7	4	2	» O
    ________hundreds_________________________tens	UN1T3 ■ TOP—ROM^—H^I m A1N CIVILIAN OCCUPATION_~	BOTTOM ROW ( 14 > ZNcTTeST OCCUPATION.
    FIGURE 16. INNER-ROW CODING.
    47
    TM 12-425
    101
    17 Jun 44
    101. CODING THE SOLDIER’S QUALIFICATION CARD, W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 20.
    a.	General. The operation of coding the information shown on the soldier’s qualification card, W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20, will be performed by code clerks after the classifier has completed his duties. The code clerk will mark with a pencil across the appropriate holes in each code field. (See fig. 17.) When no entry is shown in a section on the face or back of the card for which a code section is provided, no marking is required.
    / 1^	.4
    /	7 * * 4 9 2	1	7	4	2	1 VA
    /	TENS	UNITS	V-
    \	) NAME	V/
    FIGURE 17. MARKING HOLES TO BE PUNCHED.
    b.	Sequence of Coding. The code sections will be marked in their numerical order; thus,
    "Name” will be marked first, "Marital status” next, etc. This procedure insures that no code section will be overlooked.
    c.	Coding Different Issues of Cards. Regardless of the printing in the borders of the various issues of the qualification card, holes in the same position will be punched in all issues of cards for any given type of information. The instructions which follow are based on the 1 September 1943 issue of the W.D., A.G.O. Forms No. 20, and it will be used as a model and guide for punching other issues.
    d.	Details and Examples. (1) Name (bottom edge). Contains two fields, tens and units, with a numerical capacity of 99. It is used for sorting the cards into alphabetical order according to enlisted men’s names. The last name only of the enlisted man is coded according to the first two, three, or four letters of the name. This code is an alphabetic grouping in which each group is assigned a code number according to the name code shown in appendix II. The enlisted man’s name is the first entry on the card. The last name is written first. The code clerk will observe the first two, three, or four letters of the last name, refer to the name code, ob
    . (1)-®n*me___________XlgvfV Howard_____________________Zeon____________4oio4> 176___________a I f ■ HO____________Ci) f.
    W ” S	(PRINT CLIA»i»)	M*Mt)	(FIRST NAM«)	(MIOOCI HAMl)	ARMY BEW1AI. NUMBER	HTIOHT	WtlOHT	RACE	I
    a. : ————TV	■	I,.A~AT.T|W«U, •... - .	!
    ? (2) BIRTHPLACE OF SOLDIER \\STGEORGE,	IIPu	- YEARS MAW OCCUPATION________________________ ______1—-----LL__£  5-------——
    <	(•.»■ otv|no .U\or u. •. OR NA«< or rAitoR country)	(occupatiqral o.ct.oraby cod.) tramtw	PPEC.psr.no. oi.-ii or mu j
    Ak ° (3) DATE OF BIRTH OF SOLpIER ..	________________________-______S'SK. 5
    ~	+	I	____(pay)।		COO*. AHO SHORT |(13) cwu ®|__________ , .
    • i	(4) CITIZEN^----------*-----V'TfJ |R3 I-----1 NON-CITIZEN □ _____________ORQ£R COO Kt MG_________________________________ g «	* •
    ------hT* OF DEPENDENTS—^| ■■■■............. .	- ---- ..	■ --| I • • I
    0	\ (alv	"""____________________________________________'
    .	" I (7) BIRTHPLACE OF MOTH£R_\_	A X	G	------------------------------------—---,---- *
    e g ■ r ______________ .—V;	Xoodew.	r	I Ma
    - (I)-® EDUCATION	v	---------- X 9 Caa to Car_____________ 13 ----•-----~----------r------------------- " >	*	*
    • _t '	Ar to Az	“	X.-, Caa to Cg------------- 14 Arc’S	last date of	3
    = i YEAR LEFT SCHOOL_________at 10 az------------ \ Ch to Chz______________ 15 TO At:	______—.EMPLOYMENT---------- ’ ' w
    _ ■ -----------------1 " I CRA0.’ ■	B	\ Ci to Cn------------ 16	H‘“8 ■ "OT "*"•	t	° a a
    •s SCHOOL — Baa to Baq_____________________________ 4 \	------------ H 127 MPTWOBTH M..	___ «
    ■ 1 '	Kno vts no Tin r n(t	k \Cor to Cq---------—_ 18 >ir)	(»t»«.t)(or»)(.tat.)	-	_
    •« | 1..........etoo?~s—	Be.t'o« V*°-----------------------------------10_______________________________________________= r•
    TH (gn--------------3----r_ . Ben to Bb__________ 7	\	r..„. „ „i„L, I’M*
    • - 5  HIGH SCHOOL	Bl to Bn----L------- S \	D	.	_____ p
    ■ ------------—-----------Aegjn Bo ____________ » Da to Dd____________ 20 t>£COR»TO*__________________ I_______E.__I J ___ 2
    ®- i|w|Si«S»"	wo.botmMrr*/o>t
    • < ’	V ____________________exrtizioG. peso dip	........» s <>*.*
    £ <«.!> HOST OMOUATt	\	PlL K'VPS WPZLPAPCPIPO l(U) wu.. ® 1"'°'“"° j .
    _	- TRADE. NIGHT OR	\	—--—------—-------------------------------------------—---— ? A A
    - '*■*' BUSINESS SCHOOL	1	•--- .	_ . --TX mVmW
    • : . ________ I .	1,	\	(15) -® ADDITIONAL OCCUPATIONS. HOBBIES. ETC.	| ,HOTOGRAPHY|,FL.t | |
    a*-	(3)-® LANGUAGES (CHECK APPROPRIATE SPACES) S—SPEAKS	R—READS	W—MUTES	4*^*.*^	1	•	»W»a
    --------------------1---------IT-------- OTMgR-L A NOU AGE 8X.M)	OTHER GYMNASTIC^Z 2
    SPANISH FRENCH GERMAN VPS" I-’"'Y ' -  .............. ..... ■■■	- ■ - . .	- ■ ■■ ■	- ■ ..... ■■ ■■■ — — . ■ a a
    W " - ___________ L /f**1.	|<-r>|w . [5 r^— a |w \w	C™..."/"™* t«.t (17)-® APTITUDE TESTS (!»)•© OTHER TESTS_ - W . W
    a«C FAIRLY WELL *	" W ’	” W *	"	’	” W " ”lw F0>M a oat! I C«APt . BCOWt T«T NO. CPAOt ■ >co«« trrt brape • BCOR1 » _a.a
    • FLUENTLY * P *	* | •	"	*	•	"	•	"	*	•	" ft* /bjS'5 42 | 277*-£_----1_________________________. _________ : o a O a
    ■*—s nV® s>n>£E COMMAND OR	r ",	'	1PtVO NAME CODE I--------------------------------------1---------1	"•y|
    *; S>SK3LWt"UST""T sect™MOOK/^G fOK	.-i j-----------------------------■■-------’
    • ■ • i tn)-® sports in which	track	----—	■■ -............. .	— ■-	• m "
    <• qualified	Vt I	- A
    a « ■ -	| I •*« BAH [Wtq »OYT PALL I WRESTLING ( T-ll| I .....	-! I . —	-	—— -	- ■	- o e • a * a
    t (12)-® TALENT FOR FURNISHING PUBLIC ENTERTAINMENT ——  	(20)-®	« a a
    •	HIGHEST POSITION	’	j -W-W
    ■ MUSICAL INSTRUMENT Q	SINGING Q THEATRICAL Q	;-------	....
    :	.	..mz............----------------'I/1 ' -m.L | ..	.	.. latl |">
    “ n ► “	AAINR	•»»*	«N>A	MARON	[I	AX1RH	SRla	KA IMO	(lA* ■>’	• J • MAO ■•W
    • > >»• • • •	• • • o|^ > • •!» •••!•••• • •1*1* *!• • •8 *!•
    FIGURE 18. CODING NAME.
    48
    17 Jun 44
    tain the code number corresponding to these letters, and write the code number just above the printed word ''Name." The appropriate holes of the name code will then be marked, bearing in mind that this is a sequence code. (See fig. 18.)
    (2) Marital status (top edge). Consists of two direct codes. In the section "Marital status” on the face of the card, entries indicate marital status as follows: M—married; S—single; D—divorced; W widower; and the number of dependents, if any. The code clerk marks hole 38, "Mrd.,” for the entry "M” only, and hole 39, "Dep.” for entry of any number of dependents. "Single” is not coded. Example: Entry is "S” and for dependents is "2.” Code clerk does not mark hole 38, "Mrd,” but does mark hole 39, "Dep.” (See fig. 19.)
    TM 12-425
    101
    dicating the highest level of education. This coding specifically designates the holes to be marked. Thus, 1-2 at the left of "College or university” means that holes 1 and 2 in the Education code section are to be marked. Since only one level of education can be marked, the interviewer indicates the one to be coded by a check mark through the proper code symbol. The designations "L-7” and "L-ll” in the rectangles for non-English and Illiterate mean that hole 7 and hole 11 in the Education code section on the left edge of the card are to be marked if a check mark is placed in the respective rectangle. These are direct codes. (See fig. 20.)
    (4) Languages (bottom edge). Contains five direct codes. Under "Languages” on the face of the card, check marks indicate the enlisted man’s ability
    (5)-® MARITAL STATUS
    NUMBER OF DEPENDENTS____
    FIGURE 19. CODING MARITAL STATUS.
    s
    f39	38
    DEP. MRD.
    (5) MAR ST
    (3) Education (left edge). Contains one code field, six holes. Under "Education” on the face of the card, spaces are provided for non-English speaking in the rectangle "non-E, L-7”; illiterate, in the rectangle "L-ll”; in space designated "School,” entries on appropriate line show details of schooling. The entry to be coded is indicated by a check mark (\/) through the coding at the left of the line in-
    to speak, read, or write languages other than English and indicate whether the language is known fluently or just fairly well. In the edition of 1 February 1942, and subsequent editions, rectangles have been added to indicate whether a foreign language can be spoken, read, or written, but the.coding has not been changed. The code symbols printed under each of the languages and under "Fluently” designate the
    W.
    O	_	\	----- -----
    — |B|J|__.
    (8)-© EDUCATION	NON-E |t 7 • | ILLITERAlE. |l , 1 j W
    i YEAR LEFT SCHOOL	_	----- =---------------------------
    I YEARS I GRAD- NAME AND LOCATIONS MAJOR SUBJECT DEGREE 7
    £	SCHOOL	com- UATED OF INSTITUTIONS	OR i	AND DATE
    SCHOOL	pLeTeo YES| NU	ATTENDED	SPECIALIZATION RECEIVED
    GRAMMAR SCHOOL $	K fi fiJK fl K.E£ ! LL.	V3
    (Sri)_______________	___________ _______________ O-------------- ------- Kn
    (SF2) HIGH SCHOOL • A-	CH ICAGO, /Z.L ■______FjCADCMlC_________________
    'W	— ——— — — —UNIV. BUSINESS AB
    (1’2) UNIVERSITY 4- '''' CHICAGO,	AONIHJ-
    FIGURE 20. CODING EDUCATION.
    49
    TM 12-425
    101
    17 Jun 44
    holes to be marked. Thus, "B-35” under "Spanish” means to mark hole 35, bottom edge of card, "Languages” code section. (See fig. 21.)
    "XL,” is a direct code to indicate "Excels.” Jn the edition of 1 February 1942, the title of this section on the face of the card is changed from "Favorite
    \ 1(9)-® LANGUAGES (check appropriate space?) S-^peaks R-reads	W—writes W
    \l	277 F 2722 2272 71 722277772 II other languages (a-sa)
    1	SPANISH	FRENCH I GERMAN ----------------------—rr—------------
    \	(b-3S)	।	(B-36)	|| IB-3T) \\CHfN£S£ ||
    y	s 2? Tw 2s Tr 2v [Ts r Ty fs r w s r "w
    . FAIRLY WELL	s/	I	&
    / fluently	w s , ” F F i* ‘''ll5 R s R w V
    /	(B-39>	'C	s/	,	,	(4
    I	"X
    <3 9	38	37	36	35	Zd
    ELUN	OTH	GPS
    (9) LANGUAGES
    FIGURE 21.	CODING LANGUAGES.
    (5)	Service command or department of enlistment or induction. Contains nine direct codes, one for each service command. If the enlisted man is enlisted or inducted in a department, the information is not coded. The hole corresponding to the service command number will be marked. The "9” is out of numerical position because of a different arrangement on the original edition of the soldier’s qualification card, the later change making it necessary to place Ninth Service Command out of position in order to maintain coding uniformity with cards already in use. Example: The entry on the card is "Fourth.” Code clerk /narks hole 4 in the code section "Service command of enlistment or induction.” (See fig. 22.)
    (6)	Qualified sport (left edge). Contains one field with a numerical capacity of nine. One hole,
    sports” to "Sports in which qualified,” but the coding remains the same. The rectangle opposite each sport and under "Excels” contains the printed code symbol for that item. Thus, the rectangle following "Track” contains the symbol "L-SF-1.” "L” means left edge of card; "SF” and "1” are the holes to be marked in "Qualified sport” code section. Check marks are placed in appropriate rectangles by the interviewer. If more than one sport is checked, the interviewer must indicate by double check marks (VV) t^ie sport to be coded, since only one can be coded. "Excels,” however, can be coded with any one ot the sports designated. Example: Check mark is placed in rectangle "Excels” and in rectangle ’'Wrestling.” Code clerk marks holes XL, 7 and 1, since the code number for wrestling is 8. (See fig. 23.)
    w7Tn77(77T7Rvice 'command or	IN
    Il department of enlistment FOUIZTt-l S.C-
    II OR INDUCTION-..	------- /?
    ^1/
    8	7	6	5	4	3	2 I	9 2
    (to) SERV COM OF ENLISTMENT OR INDUCTION	V
    FIGURE 22.	CODING SERVICE COMMAND.
    50
    TM 12-425
    101
    17 Jun 44
    \ 1(11)-© SPORTS	IN WHICH FXCELLS	TRACK	I L-sr i I	BASKET BALL I -F ■> I	BOXING	I sr-7	I
    M	QUALIFIED	....... ................. '	। . 1 Rp
    \	x\.	BASE BALL	| SF ; |	SOFT BALL | 41 |	WRESTLING	jV?- I
    Z----------------------------- FOOT BALL I ~l I TENNIS I 4-2 I OTHER I TZ IvL
    I	SCHOOL OR TEAM	I-----1	I_ _l	I_ I
    \ u 0
    j SF ' 7	4	2	'1 Zl
    (ll) QUALIFIED SPORT
    FIGURE 23.	CODING QUALIFIED SPORT.
    (7)	Talent for furnishing public entertainment (left edge). Contains one field, three direct codes. Entries are made by placing check marks in the appropriate rectangles. All three items can be coded since this is a direct code section. Printed in each rectangle is the number of the hole to be marked. The "L” indicates that the code section is on the left edge of the card. Example: Check marks have been placed in rectangles for "Musical instrument” and "Theatrical.” Code clerk marks holes 27 and 29. (See fig. 24.)
    explained in 10(W(2)©). The hole designated "Skilled” at the left of the hundreds field will be marked only when the word "Skilled” is written in the rectangle designated "Degree of skill” at the right of specification serial number. Example: On the line "Main occupation” the interviewer has printed "Cook”; in the rectangle "Spec. Ser. No.” the number is "060” and in the rectangle "Degree of skill” the entry is "Skilled.” The code clerk marks the coding as follows: (See fig. 25).
    a (12)-© TALENT FOR. FURNISHING PUBLIC ENTERTAINMENT
    Z ,x MUSICAL INSTRUMENT	SINGING L.,8	THEATRICAL
    4
    29	28	/27 Y
    T S Ml.
    (12) ENTERTMT.
    FIGURE 24.	CODING ENTERTAINMENT.
    (8)	Main civilian occupation (right edge, outer row). This code section, on the right edge of the card, contains three fields or digits (units, tens, and hundreds) and has a numerical capacity of 999. The number to be marked is found in the section “Main occupation” on the face of the card, in the rectangle Specification serial number.” This number is marked in the units, tens and hundreds fields of the outer row of holes for selective coding, described in 10(W(2)(c). Each of the three digits is marked as
    Note. Entries in the spaces "Occupational dictionary code” and "Trade test indicated” are not coded.
    (9)	Second best occupation (right edge, inner row). Mark the inner or bottom row of holes in the same manner as is done for Main Civilian Occupation, but only if a specification serial number appears in the appropriate space ort the card under "Second best occupation.” Be sure that the marking of holes in the inner row is distinct and does not conflict with marking Of the outer row of holes. (See figs. 25 and 26.)
    5!
    TV 12-425
    101
    17 Jun 44
    \ —■■1^■ YEARS at it wkly WAGE S'
    \ (13)-^) •	s V
    M	COOK	, Is_______
    \M AIN OCCUPATION---------------- [Itrade test	spec. SER NO degree of sk.ll
    \ (OCCUPATIONAL DICTIONARY code)	INt
    1	INDICATED
    /	______________________ I____________________0^0 3K
    i JUST WHAT DID ~	\	(13) CIVILIAN ® ____________/
    /■YOU DO’-----------------------------¥----------------_____—i
    \ 1^1^	41^ 4 4 4	41 L
    \ Skilled SK	7	. 4	21	1	/o	sy	7	'4.	' 2	I	O	SF	7	4,	2	1/ /o
    j Skilled 'SF	7	4	' 2	1 O	SF	7	'4	2	1	O	SF	7	/4	2	' 1 O
    /	HUNDREDS	.	TENS	UNITS	<-
    /	TOP ROW • (l3) MAIN CIVILIAN OCCUPATION	BOTTOM ROW (l4> 2ND BEST OCCUPATION.	S
    / ------ --——J””-----------------------------------------------------------------/
    FIGURE 25.	CODING CIVILIAN OCCUPATIONS.
    9——“	"	FeaASAT.tIwKLV WAOeIT
    jpation TRUCK. DRIVER_________________________________________ I*__________/?
    •jjQ	SPECIFICATION DEGREE OF SKILL q
    ■ ■	■ . ----- ■	SERIAL NO. S-SK \
    LLUSTRATION ABOVE FOR CODING	trade test---V
    "J	INDICATED	Vx
    _______________________________________________ (14) CIVILIAN @	VL.
    FIGURE 26.	LOCATION OF CODE NUMBER FOR SECOND-BEST OCCUPATION.
    (10)	Hobbies (left edge). Contains one field, the numerical capacity of which is nine. Entries are made on the face of the card by placing check marks in the appropriate rectangles or writing the hobby on the line "other.” If there are more entries than one, the hobby to be coded is indicated by double check marks. The code symbol for radio and photography are printed in the respective rectangles. ("L” designates the left edge of the card.) (See fig. 27.) Codes for hobbies are as follows:
    Additional occupations, hobbies, etc.	Code No.	Mark
    Radio		1	SF and 1
    Photography 		2	SF and 2
    Motorcycling 		3	2 and 1
    Rifle or revolver shooting		4	SF and 4
    Hunting 		5	4 and 1
    Florseback riding 		6	4 and 2
    Trap or skeet 		7	SF and 7
    Aviation 		8	7 and 1
    Miscellaneous (after
    "other”) 		9	7 and 2
    (11) Tests (left edge). "Type” represents the kind of test (A.G.C., aptitude, other, trade) rather
    than th? type of the Army General Classification Test. The score of the Army General Classification Test will be the only score coded except where a 2 abc non-language test has been given and the Army grade is higher than the one made by the enlisted man on the Army General Classification Test, in which case the higher grade will be the one coded and punched. The code field "Type” of code section "Tests” will be coded as:
    Type of test	Code No.	Mark
    		Edition of 1 February 1941 and prior	Edition of 1 February 1942 and subsequent
    Army General Classification 		1	1	1
    Aptitude 		2	2	2
    Other 		3	/.	3
    Trade 		4	SF	4
    It will be observed that the code for "Type of test” is a direct code. This coding is used in order to select those enlisted men who have taken types of
    52
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12—425
    101
    7 (15).® ADDITIONAL OCCUPAT^NS.^OBBies ETC ftAOl0[J—| p;0TO6RaPhy[J~^U \ other MOTO/ZCYCUNG	II
    V 4
    ’ SF 7	4	'2	'\	$
    f ( « 5) AOOTN w 3C Z a M D 9	V
    FIGURE 27.	CODING HOBBIES.
    tests other than the Army General Classification Test., in order to review the results of such tests in the light of special qualifications or assignments. (See fig. 28.)
    (vz) Army General Classification Test. All forms of this test (la, lb, 1c, etc.) will be coded for Type as No. 1. If the "Type” code field is coded for No. 1, the "Grade” code field must also be coded. Entries in the column "Grade—Score” will express the grade in roman numerals, from I to V. These will be coded and marked as:
    Coding of A.G.C.T. grade
    For grade	Mark
    I 	;		SF and 1
    II 		SF and 2
    Ill 		2 and 1
    IV 		SF and 4
    V 		4 and 1

    (b)	Aptitude tests. Coded for kind only. If there are any entries in this section of the card, the code clerk will mark hole 2 in the "Type” field.
    (c)	Other tests. Coded for kind only. If there are any entries in this section of the card, the code clerk will mark hole 3 in the "Type” field.
    (d)	Trade test ratings. Coded for kind only. If there are any entries in this section of the card, the code clerk will mark hole 4 in the "Type” field.
    (12)	Highest position of leadership (left edge). Contains a single hole. Example: In the section "Highest position of leadership” on the face of the card, the entry was made "Construction foreman.” The code clerk marks the single hole in this section. If the interviewer has not indicated any qualities of leadership, this section is not coded. (See fig. 29.)
    (13)	Previous military experience (top edge). Only one hole on the top edge of thg card will be used to code previous military experience. If there is any entry in the previous military experience section on the back of the card, the single hole on the top edge of the card will be marked. (See fig. 30.)
    (14)	Service schools (right edge). Contains two fields, tens and units, with a numerical capacity of 39.
    (a)	Army Air Forces schools. A separate series of code numbers is provided for Army Air Forces schools only.
    (b)	Other service schools. Another series of code numbers is provided to code service schools in each of the arms or services except the Army Air Forces.
    (c)	Code numbers. The code numbers for service schools and their markings are shown in appendix IV. The entries to be coded will be found in the "Service schools” section on the back of the card. (See fig. 31.)
    (15)	Assignment limitations (bottom edge). Contains one field, direct coding, two holes. In the "Assignment limitations” section on the back of the card, space is provided for entering pertinent information. The code clerk marks hole 33 or 34 on the bottom edge of the card in accordance with the character of such information. (See fig. 32.)
    (16)	Military occupational specialist (top edge). Contains four fields (units, tens, hundreds, and thousands). When the enlisted man has been classified in a military occupational specialty, entries will be made in the "Classification in military specialties” section on the back of the card. The military occupational specialty will not be coded except on authority of the unit or similar commander. In the event that the enlisted man has been classified in more than one military occupational specialty, it is the responsibility
    53
    of the unit or similar commander to determine which one will be coded. (See fig. 33.)
    (17) Potential (top edge). This code section relates to military occupational specialties. Its purpose is to indicate that an enlisted man has qualifications fitting him potentially for a particular military specialty but that he requires further training before he can be definitely so classified. If the entry under "Classification in military specialties” on the back of
    the card is "Truck driver, heavy, 245,” followed by a date in the column headed "Potential,” the code clerk marks the hole "Potential,” in addition to marking the punching for the Specification Serial No. 245. If later a check mark is placed either under "Semiskilled” or "Skilled,” the "Potential” coding is corrected by applying .a correction slip. (See fig. 33.)
    (18) Other duties (top edge). This code section also relates to military occupational specialty. In
    54
    TM 12-425	17 Jun 44
    101
    y 16) -© c^s.ncAT.ON TEST	OD -© APTITUDE TESTS (18)-® OTHER TESTS_
    ) FORM & DATE GRADE - SCORE	TEST No GRADE • SCORE	TEST	GRADE • SCORE
    Id /0-U-U 2n' 102 MA-1 E 7!;V
    (19)-© TRADE TEST RATINGS	A
    / SPEC. SER NO	SCORE______________________________________________/ ?
    A 24-7 S|
    \ SF 4	? 2	' 1	'4	3	*2	• 1	/
    /	GRADE (a.G C.T.)	TYPE
    / (is) (it) ( 1 e) (19) TESTS———————— Vx
    FIGURE 28.	CODING TESTS.
    ii
    .	I	1147 IN
    position CONSTRUCTION FOREMAN______________|C	JK .1^
    R S HIP--- ——------------------------	gf	ZIl Jd r J
    s military)	F';	yg I ”ipe, j V\
    ■—	———"""W
    FIGURE 29.	CODING LEADERSHIP.
    /	.	IL
    /	(21)-® PREVIOUS MILITARY EXPERIENCE	&	___________
    I	Z1	IcategoryI LAST	special TRAINING RECEIVED	&	\	4^ A'
    /	ARM OR	YE|AmR5 HIGHEST	R A DIS- --	last	\	/	&
    /	SERVICE	GRADE	N G	CHARGE	SPECIFIC NATURE VEARS MOS date	/	mil	V
    \	c C C ETC (teas)  _______________(v e a a > Sy / exp	\g-
    \ INF 3 Pvt/CL NG ~	X
    /	--p—L	■
    FIGURE 30.	CODING PREVIOUS MILITARY EXPERIENCE.
    17 Jun 44	TM 12-425
    	101
    4—--------------------------—t—-------------------------r--------------iV
    /	NUMBER	/-oiidcct	YEAR GRADUATED VX
    / (22)-® SERVICE SCHOOLS. ARM. of	COURSE	rating (^F any) V.
    /	OR SERVICE	weeks _________________________rating uc any/ r.
    ( Acts Scott Field 15 fiiRPLAivc M&H. 134$ - SAT g
    f  y^Yirk—~
    r„t„	Code_____/ P____________
    Entry	No. |
    I Tens field I Units field	§
    ________________________________Z.______________
    Army Air Forces schools:
    Airplane mechanics___	1	SF and  -—&
    Aircraft armorer_____	2	0—_ 777^-SJ^and 2.	----
    Aircraft machinist___	3	0----- 2	and""h—"--------------------— y
    Aircraft metal worker— 4 0--------- SF and 4.	---yi—-—--------------7------—7
    Aircraft welders----- ,5	0----- 4	and 1.	I	w	.r?
    Air Corps technical and 6	0----- 4	and 2.	I	sf 2	1/0 4f 7	4	2 /t o
    supply clerks.	I
    Link trainer instructor __	7	0---- SF and 7.1	vx
    Parachute riggers____	8 0__.------ 7 and 1.	_________ UN,T	V
    Administrative clerks— 9 Q- ~-n-- - - ? an(^	____(_22j_S E R V1C E SCHOOLS	| V I
    FIGURE 31, CODING SERVICE SCHOOLS.	J
    \(23)-@ ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS	V	\
    \	Vs	\	3 4 * 3 3 K
    / BRONCHIAL ASTHMA - MODERATE	>	\ C°°»V Y.cmt
    /	Zy	)	K
    FIGURE 32. CODING ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS.
    JTTTTTTc/ *	gpec	s£mi’	1A
    CLASSIFICATION IN MILITARY SPECIALTIES_ SERlAt POTENTIAL SKILLED SKILLED TVPE 0F
    \l	DESIGNATION	No	EQUIPMENT
    X TRUCK DRIVER - HEAVY 245 ZJAm4$ f MAtj43 5Jum43
    \ LIGHT WEAPONS /V C O' ~~ /2/Z________________4SEP43 /°DEC4$
    j Id I f(
    A.F 7	4	2/1 O SF /7	4	2 A ' o ' /sf ' 7 V 2	O " >SF ' 7 -’ 4	O
    --------^-ousands I tens z	4un1t<2 y n
    MILITARY OCCUPATIONAL SPECIALIST	’----------------RJ
    FIGURE 33. CODING MILITARY OCCUPATIONAL SPECIALIST.	55
    TM 12-425
    101
    some instances, the enlisted man will have been classified as a military occupational specialist and the specification serial number will have been punched, but entries in the columns "Principal duty" and "Spec. Ser. No.” under "Record of current service" on the back of the card show that the enlisted man is assigned to a duty other than his military specialty. In such cases the "Other duties” code section will be marked and punched. If, however, the situation later changes and the enlisted man is assigned to duty in his military specialty, the punching "Other duties” will be corrected. The purpose of this coding is to furnish ready access to those enlisted men who are assigned to duties other than their military specialty, and to provide a check against "losing” such men in relation to their particular specialty. (See fig. 34.)
    17 Jun 44
    (19) Month and year of enlistment or induction (bottom edge). Contains three fields, units and tens for year, and one field for month. The units and tens field for year are used to denote the last two digits of the year. Assume that the entry under "Date of enlistment or induction” on the back of the card is 15 December, 1941. The last two digits of the year, ’41, are marked in the usual manner, "SF” and "4” in the tens field, "SF” and "1” in the units field. The number representing the month is marked in a different manner, since this is the only code field on the card in which a numerical capacity of more than 9 (one digit) is used in a one-digit field. In this case, 12 months must be provided for. Therefore, the marking for the month of December is 7, 4, and 1. (See fig. 35.)
    /	(29) RECORD OF CURRENT SERVICE
    \_______“T----------------------------- '	SPEC Z©
    ' DATE	ORGANIZATION AND STATION	GRADE PRINCIPAL DUTY SER No A. ________ __
    ^4Sept43 MA /nF. Ft.BENNING,GA-	SGT. 1-IGHT^wfapons !Q/z_ Ff
    BOCT 4$ CO-A W1* 'NF. FT-BENNING, GA ■ SGT- ACTING /S* SGT. 585‘i^:	4	► Other
    FIGURE 34. CODING OTHER DUTIES.
    \ (30)-® DATE OF	OECEMBEZ. /5, 19 4!I V
    I
    ----p-	--------------1______________________________i_______ .
    \ SF / 7 / 4	2^1 SF 7/4	2	1 O ^SF 7	4	2	/ 1 O	F:
    J	MONTH	TENS	YEAR	UNITS
    /	<30) MONTH AND' YEAR OF ENLISTMENT OR INDUCTION
    FIGURE 35. CODING MONTH AND YEAR OF ENLISTMENT OR INDUCTION.
    56
    17 Jun 44
    The coding for all 12 months is as follows:
    Month	Code No.	Mark holes
    January 		1 		SF and 1
    February 		2 		SF and 2
    March 		3 		2 and 1
    April 		4 .,		SF and 4
    May 		5 		4 and 1
    June 		6 		4 and 2
    JuIy		7 		SF and 7
    August 		8 		7 and 1
    September 			9 ........................	7 and 2
    October 		10 		7, 2, and 1
    November 		11 		7 and 4
    December ;		12 		7, 4, and 1
    (20) Current oversea service (bottom edge). This is to be coded whenever a soldier has been assigned to a unit serving outside of continental United States or to duty on an Army transport, as shown under "Record of current service.” If not already punched, this position will be punched by the unit to which he is first permanently assigned upon his return from overseas service. When a unit returns from oversea duty this hole will be punched on the qualification cards of all personnel assigned to the unit. (See fig. 36.)
    TM 12-425
    101-102
    the interviewing officer has completed his duties. The code clerk will mark with black pencil across the appropriate holes in each code field. Whenever an item on the face of the card has no entries opposite it, no marking is required.
    b. Oa’der of Coding. Items will be coded according to the order in which they appear in the body of the card: That is, name will be coded first, followed by arm or service, component, date of birth, etc. The circled letter after the item number in the body of the card represents the edge on which the code section is located. For instance, the code section for "Arm or service” is located on the top edge of the card. It will be noted that not all items in the body of the card have corresponding code sections.
    c. Details and Examples. (1) Code section for name (bottom edge). Contains two fields (units and tens) with a numerical capacity of 99. It is used for sorting the cards into alphabetical order according to officers’ names. The last name only is coded according to the first two, three, or four letters of the name. This is the same name code as that used with W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 20, and is found in appendix II. The officer’s name is the first entry on the card. The last name is written first. The code clerk will observe the first two, three, or four letters of the last name, refer to the name code, obtain the code number corresponding to these let-
    	' J,			— —
    	(29) RECORD OF CURRENT SERVICE					L	VTilV Vx MARK THIS /	I )
    	DATE 3/JAn 42	ORGANIZATION AND STATION fit MED. REGT. CO.CCAmpBARKtLCY	GRADE Pvt. '	PRINCIPAL DUTY Sasic	SPEC. SER. NO 52! \
    	n/dov 42	Is* WED. REGT. CO.C FT. LEIA/	PFC	SU/ZG. TECH.	225
    	Z5SEP43 4 J An 44	MEO.RET. SC ADC -APO "PC? SEATTLE S.LI. * f/f FT- LRlA/roM	T-5 7-5	SURG. TECH- SL/RG. TECH-	225- 225
    						AFTER THIS ENTRY	J

    						lx
    FIGURE 36. CODING CURRENT OVERSEA SERVICE.
    102. CODING OFFICER’S AND WARRANT OFFICER’S QUALIFICATION CARD. W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 66-1.
    a. General. The operations of coding the various items on the officer’s and warrant officer’s qualification cards will be performed by code clerks after
    ters, and write the code number just above the printed word "Name.” The appropriate holes of the Name code will then be marked, bearing in mind that this is a sequence code. W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 66-1, issued prior to 1 September 1943, have no code section titled "Name.” At the right of the row of holes on the bottom edge of such cards of prior issue is a code section with no title. It contains 12 holes
    57
    TM 12-425	17 Jun 44
    102
    numbered from 28 to 39 inclusive, and also num-	This hole will be marked if an entry has been made
    bered SF-7-4-2-1-0 in each of two code fields.	in the corresponding space on the card. (See fig.
    This section is to be considered as though titled 41.)
    "Name,” and used to code the officer’s name as out- (6) CCC service (top edge). Same as (5) above.
    lined above. The holes designated "SF” and "0” (See fig. 42.)
    are not used and are to be ignored. Only those holes (7) Assignment limitations (bottom edge). Con-numbered 7, 4, 2, and 1 are to be considered, as in tains one hole. This hole will be marked if there is all codes designed solely for sequence sorting. (See an entry in the corresponding item on the card. (See fig. 37.)	fig. 43.)
    t (1)@	~	| %
    / name_______JONE 5	J OH N	Q	Xy
    \	(last name)	(first name) (middle name)
    e X 1^ X XMk
    39	7	* 3 4 5	'	7	2	’	28 I'	ISSUES PRIOR TO 1 SEPTEMBER 1943
    (1) NAME	«
    USE THESE HOLES
    2	1	O SF I 7	' 4	2 / X	I O
    36	35	34	33 ’ 32	31	30	29	’ 28	VN
    FIGURE 37. CODING NAME.
    (2) Arm or service (top edge). Contains two (8)	Foreign	residence (top	edge). This	hole
    fields (units and tens) and has a numerical capacity will be marked if the officer has served or lived out-of 39. Code numbers will be found in appendix I.	side of the continental United States, as evidenced by
    (See fig. 38.)	an entry on the card. (See fig. 44.)
    \ e < X XX b
    \	(3)-®	y|>	\ ZSF 2 / I O 4f 7'4	2	1
    / fNF U	\ I	TENS	I__________UN TS______f Jhb
    / [armor service!	\	, © ARM OR SERVICE	~Z A
    FIGURE 38. CODING ARM OR SERVICE.
    (3) Component (top edge). Contains four direct (9) Grade (top edge). Contains seven direct codes: Regular Army, National Guard, Reserve, and codes representing grades as follows: Warrant Of-Army of the United States. Entry on card will indi- ficer, Second Lieutenant, First Lieutenant, Captain, cate hole to be marked. (See fig. 39.)	Major, Lieutenant Colonel, and Colonel. The of-
    (4) Date of birth (bottom edge). Contains two	ficer’s grade	in which he is serving will be marked
    fields (units and tens), with a numerical capacity of	according to	the entry under "Grade.”	Both grades
    99. The last two digits of the officer’s year of birth	of Warrant	Officers will be coded in	the one hole
    will be marked in this section, such as "02,” "14,”	for Warrant	Officer. (See fig. 45.)
    "86,” etc. (See fig. 40.)	(10) Type of duty (top edge). Contains four
    (5) War service (top edge). Contains one hole. direct codes representing special, administrative, staff,
    58
    17 Jun 44	TM 12-425
    102
    \ (4) • ®	V
    ) RES	) ’4 Z'3 12 ” B
    f _____—__ VX	/ads res no ra vX
    / COMPONENT	/ (D COMPONENT	’Bx
    FIGURE 39.	CODING COMPONENT.
    —”"T^k	Ik
    /	'■'JO	¥S	|SF7 4 2l/oSF 7	4 2l/oJt§>
    /	5-/MI. tROO K	_______te NS _____| o_ UNITS________, k\
    \	DATE OF BIRTH	I	R\
    FIGURE 40.	CODING DATE OF BIRTH.
    \	(9)"®	YEARS MONTHS ARMORSERVICE COMBAT OR ADMIN. DUTY k	\
    \ WAR SERVICE t j ‘	7	B
    \	'	3 INF. SGT CONI!5AT &	/ «*» Vk
    / *•• —---- •	-	A	/
    FIGURE 41.	CODING WAR SERVICE.
    \	'	■■	■»■.»—■■!—	. I M~k	\
    \	(10)‘(Z)	YEARS MONTHS SERV COM.,__TYPE DUTY______ WX	\
    \ c c r	/	*	*	kx	j ccc vx^j
    y service	8	4^ Co. cmd£	B 1	’
    FIGURE 42.	CODING CCC SERVICE.
    Yr——-------------------	*	~	7\ \	<7 f
    \ 01) - @	pooh vision	B \	< W
    j LIMITATIONS PHYSICAL_AUTHORITY_Z Tfi 5CU	,0 OCT TnGRADE____RETIRED	'	*“T'
    a------------	1 L±JB
    FIGURE 43.	CODING ASSIGNMENT LIMITATIONS.
    / r..................................................................   l	\ / I
    /	(12)-(T) SERVICE OR	/	1/^ I W;
    \ RESIDENCE OUTSIDE	GERMANY l'ia?Q\	?	(	1^1 W
    \ {CONTINENTAL U S. LOCATION T ‘ 1	YEARS j£MONTHS*"?	V I r°s I
    FIGURE 44.	CODING FOREIGN RESIDENCE.
    59
    TM 12-425	17 Jun 44
    102 (14) - (f) GRADE—APPOINTMENTS AND PROMOTIONS WARRANT OFFICER	CHIEF	o r.. .	■ ■ r-1itr-n * mt	/-» a dt-a i ki
    (junior grade) warrant officer 2nd LIEUTENANT 1ST LIEUTENANT	CAPTAIN >
    DATE APPOINTED OR PROMOTED	g AUG	/ $£P 43
    DATE OF RANK IN GRADE	g $JG 4o 4 SEP 43	%
    \ 1^	^1 W
    J	24	23	22	21 '20	19	18
    /	COL. CLJ^	MAJ.	CAP. YV	iL°	w °-
    !	T (l<) GRADE '	'	Zw
    FIGURE 45.	CODING GRADE.
    and combat duty. The type of duty which the officer	fleer is a graduate of any of these schools as evidenced
    is performing now, if he has demonstrated his pro-	by an entry, the appropriate hole will be marked,
    ficiency therein, as well as other duty in which he (See fig. 48.)
    may previously have demonstrated proficiency, will (13) Languages (top edge). Contains seven di-be marked in this section in accordance with entries rect codes representing japanese, Russian, Chinese, under Record of Service in the column "Type of	Spanish> and Qther. ]f an entfy of
    Duty. (See fig. 46.)	entries have been made in the space for "Languages,”
    (11)	Special service schools (tight edge). Con-	appropriate holes will be marked. No provision
    tains two fields (units and tens) with a numerical .	.	..	~ r .	. ,, ,
    v	• r i • is made for coding the officer s proficiency in the Ian-
    capacity of 69. The coding and marking of the van-	fi 49 )
    ous schools will be accomplished according to the Suage- ( ee &•	•/
    table shown in appendix IV. The school which was (14) Marital status (left edge). Contains two last attended will be coded. (See fig. 47.)	direct codes representing "Married” and "Other de-
    (12)	General service schools (top edge). Con-	pendents” (dependents other than wife). One or
    tains four direct codes representing Naval War Col-	both holes may be marked in accordance with the
    lege, Army Industrial College, Army War College, entry on the card. Single, Divorced, and and Command and General Staff School. If the of- "Widower” are not coded. (See fig. 50.)
    (15)-Q RECORD OF SERVICE (only principal dutyi^ DATFQ	Manner	Av
    TYPE OF DUTY UNIT’ °^AN'ZATION ---------------------------«' £• |NmALS TYPE OF DUTY UNITAr STaB
    OKblAIION	FROM	TO ance	|	51
    PLATOON LOP-	% /NF.________4 SEP A3 /2 OCT43 £X RR-__________________________
    Q>N. ADJ./Z7 # /NF.13 oct 43 /O JAN 44 SUP BK,%
    \	A'
    \	Z?8	/27	26	25
    )	COM.	ST.	ADM.	SPEC	W
    /	UK
    ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
    FIGURE 46.	CODING TYPE OF DUTY.
    60
    17 Jun 44	TM 12-425
    102
    \	(16)-® SPECIAL SERVICE SCHOOLS	||
    \	DATES	•	*	Successful
    \ from I TO-----	SCHOOL,	COURSE	Completion
    I /6OCT43 3 DEC 43 40J, G£K> '5. SCH-	PPMlMtSTRAT!QN V
    /ft	s| L
    /1SF 4	2	’ ^sf 742/10 w
    \	_____TENS	_____ UNITS	K'S
    A	S_PECJA_L_S^RVI CE SCHOOLS
    FIGURE 47.	CODING SPECIAL SERVICE SCHOOLS.
    ’ _____________(17)-® GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS
    WAR ARMY INDUSTRIAL NAVAL WAR	V,:
    COMMAND AND GENERAL STAFF SCHOOL college	college______COLLEGE	Vk
    J C§t)RSAEND/^4 5PST. ASF COMPS YEAR______ YEAR _______ YEAR	)
    \ ftzel
    I /32	31	30	29	V®
    / “G S *wc A.I.C. N W C. /	(17) GEN SER SCHOOLS
    FIGURE 48.	CODING GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS.
    C_______________ (18)-® LANGUAGES_____________________________________\
    /	SPANISH FRENCH GERMAN CHINESE RUSSIAN JAPANESE OTHE"
    f	SPEAK______________S0A7£ W6LL_______________________._______________
    \	WRITS L/ttls Some
    \ TRANS1-ATE	L'rrce Some	&
    ft	7
    39 38 Z37 Ze 35 34 33 I 7^ other s < f g c r u
    J-A_N^UA_G _E S	|
    FIGURE 49.	CODING LANGUAGES.
    61
    Taq	17 Jun 44
    IvZ
    J _______________________________________________________________________________ __________
    r~—-—*——— ____________________________________-—~
    /| (19)-®------------------------------ -----------------------—® L----------------- L
    \ [..MARITAL STATUS AND DEPENDENTS:_SINGLE _________MARRIFD	V / wEhNTS 2
    1/ /I h
    ^9 Z>8	1§N
    OTH.	Ax®
    DEP. MRD
    MARITAL VAX
    \STATUS \X\ __
    FIGURE 50.	CODING MARITAL STATUS.
    fl	(22)-® EDUCATION | |	“1)
    _______SCHOOL_______ y°A°s| NAME OF INSTITUTION	["	° EG R E E I "Icho^/ k
    ■ high school___V [ ra VER, COMA/._____________________I ZkU (	1	rf/7 W
    COLLEGE OR UNIVERSITY if RARVA/ZO C/M/V._________________|	Ux S ■	■	^^3 B
    > he/oelge/zg umiv. GER/dam/ I W73 K/ /^.g.	M
    POSTGRADUATE	' ’	~	....... '	/	।--- — P----------------
    \	IM M	i
    \	4? /26 f25
    \	P G. COLL H.S	Z4
    /	(22) EDUCATION	XX
    FIGURE 51.	CODING EDUCATION.
    \	11	' "’	'"	(24) - ,s, PARTICIPATING SPORTS
    |	I BOXING	i I C I XU|	3 BASE BALL	j	I C	I XkJ 5 snowshoeing	I , | C>®_L)^ 7 EQUITATION/^
    I	2 SOFTBALL	L—LS-LEZI	4 BASKETBALL	I---1 C.	I-XLJ 6climBIng	E lClXL.J 8. OTHER^^^'
    # m| V
    n	1	2	*3	4	^5	6	7 'Q COACH
    i	ROY	SOFT	BAS& BASKET SKI- MTN. Fn	OTHER	0R	VX\
    I	BALL	BALL BALL SNOW CL. EQ~	°™ER	XL	VSX*
    |	(24) PARTICIPATING SPORTS	bjX'
    FIGURE 52. CODING PARTICIPATING SPORTS.
    62
    (15)	Education (left edge). Contains three direct codes representing high school, college, and postgraduate. One or all three holes may be marked depending on the number of entries on the card. (See fig. 51.)
    (16)	Participating sports (bottom edge). Contains nine direct codes representing boxing, softball, baseball, basketball, skiing or snowshoeing, mountain climbing, equitation, and other, with one code for "Coach or excels.” All of the holes can be marked if entries so indicate, but coding for "Coach” or "Excels” does not indicate which sport, if more than one is coded. Reference to the entries on the card is necessary in such instances. (See fig. 52.)
    (17)	Active hobbies (bottom edge). Contains five direct codes representing radio, photography, rifle or pistol shooting, aviation and others. All of the holes can be marked if entries so indicate. (See fig. 53.)
    (18)	Main civilian occupation (right edge-outer holes). Contains three fields (units, tens, and hundreds) with a numerical capacity of 999. In this section will be coded the specification serial number of the officer’s main civilian occupation as obtained from TM 12-405 and recorded on the card. If the officer’s main civilian occupation is not found in TM 12—405, no holes will be marked in this code section. (See fig. 54.)
    (19)	Secondary civilian occupation (right edge-inner holes). Use the same procedure as for main civilian occupation. (See fig. 54.)
    (20)	Military specialties (left edge-outer and
    inner holes). Contains four fields (units, tens, hundreds, and thousands) with a numerical capacity of 9999. This code section is repeated in a second row of holes. In these sections will be coded the specification serial numbers of the officer’s two most important military specialties. This list of classifications for officers and their accompanying specification serial numbers is found in TM 12-406 or 12-407. If a military specialty is rescinded by deletion or lining-out of the entry after it has been coded, the coding will be deleted by using correction slips. (See fig 55.)
    I©3. PUNCHING PROCEDURE.
    a.	When and by Whom Accomplished. The punching is accomplished by another clerk after the code clerk has completed pencil-marking the code sections along the edges of the cards as called for by their related entries in the body of the cards. (The code clerk can accomplish the punching if it is impractical for another clerk to do so.)
    b.	Accuracy. Accuracy should never be sacrificed for speed. The accuracy with which coding and punching are accomplished is vital to the success of the sorting and selecting which follows.
    c.	Verification of Coding and Punching. The most effective method of verifying the accuracy of both coding and punching is to sequencesort each code section: Then check quickly through the cards to see that each card is coded and punched in accordance with the information appearing on the card. For example, to verify the "Name” code section, sequence-sort the Name code. Then fan through the cards, watching only the name code number writ-
    63
    17 Jun 44	TM 12-425
    102-103
    ® ACTIVE HOBBIES	Y
    \	1. radio!J 2. PHOTOGRAPHY I J 3. RIFLE OR PISTOL SHOOTING |j=J 4 AVIATIONi]	5 OTHFR C&YPT'fy
    2/34/5 kxj P Rap AV other!	Kx
    0 ACTIVE HOBBIES |	bX
    FIGURE 53. CODING ACTIVE HOBBIES.
    TM 12-425	17 Jun 44
    103
    /	'	(26) - ® MAIN CIVILIAN OCCUPATION	"""
    / poTs,t£n ^orjob TEACHER,	INTERn/t/ONaJ TRAPS_________________________%
    (	TWGHT VARIOUS CQt/RSES IN /NTEENAT/DNAL_____________________ W
    \	EXPLAIN WHAT YOU DIO \eCONOM)IC RELATIONS, /NTL.' CURRENCY & &ANKJNG I B
    / ofMemCloDyerDRESS COLUMBIA UyVERSlTy, NEW yORK Cirtf__________________________M
    / Da\es?m7lORYED ANO	,a7o	/ajn	MONTHLY SALARY	~SO OO
    /	REMUNERATE______FROM / T	j/ T0 > T 40__________OR'INCOME $ QCQ —_________ W
    /	SPECIFICATION	TM /Z- AOS	I W
    /	serial no.	ar 6Q5-9S , 60. AZO	-oeounatinniai rugTHDr^APY^rnne.__J. Vx
    \ X X (X X	L
    \	SF	7	4	2>	1 4	O	SF	7	4y	Zy	1	O	SBy	7	4	2	1,	' O	$
    /	t	e	/ /1	t	t	e	/	t
    /	SF	7	4	Z2 Z,	O	SF	7	Z4	Z2	V	O	SF	7	4	2	Z>	O	>
    /	HUNDREDS	TENS	UNITS
    (	|j^_^OW__A26)_2AA1N_CIVIL1AN_^C^ATION	BOTTOM ROW - (2t)~ SECONDARY CIV OCCUPaTTFT"
    /	(27)-® SECONDARY CIVILIAN OCCUPATION	W
    / INVESTMENT BROh/Jz________________________________________ V
    \ bought solo stock,s Bonos for /nd/v/qual. //
    \ CLIENTS. GAVE/ADVICE AS TO INVESTMENTS	k
    J SECU/Z/Ty TR/ANSACTIONS- /	X
    / U.TWARE/NC. F/ELD 0LOG. CHICAGO ,/LL._______________________________
    7 from /f^r/	TO/^7 o^hcloLesalary$ /75<.	%
    / TM I2-4GS '	'	W
    \	AR 605-95 32 3G!	A .	?-rr	I
    । ....... ’ ■	1	1	1	1,1 J«-	'	..............U ...............................   11
    FIGURE 54. CODING CIVILIAN OCCUPATIONS.
    /	(28) - (?) QUALIFICATION IN MILITARY SPECIALITIES	*1	'k;
    /	D'ESIGNATION	SPEC. SgRIAL No I DATE	&
    / ,NF c'N,r COMDii	!54Z	5 oct 43 i
    I ADJUTANT	2u0 \/oJan44 k
    U.<	X	w’
    n  ~
    |	‘K L. ■. J
    ■a	--	---------
    J	'■	J	'—-	y l"»|1 ji a iihAtdaiiM
    ■ •	-	... ” *~-~LBn
    !•	•21
    ■ A	__ _ > . .	■■■■	—	{ 2*1 i .. A. A fl
    |A ■' L.	- "T	* -	_	■' a*' <;n ' "
    • « Fx	"■ '*v ——• •-...	a	• >	“7	.......
    •j * •	■■-•.	..	*•	m-. 4>.	. (	....| .s
    *	.	■ - - ••■	. '	: XU	...
    •2J
    ,1-	’-----■ - ______ - JsJ • •
    •◄I
    x——*.......................-	I
    TM 12—125
    103
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 57. OPERATION OF THE INNER-HOLE PUNCH.
    in figure 57. The punch has a channel into which the card fits, and the cutting blade is centered over the inner hole.
    e. Procedure. The punching clerk should follow a specific routine in punching cards. Beginning at the upper right corner, punch the outer row of holes along the right edge, working for right to left, the bottom and left edges in the same manner, and the top edge last, concluding with "Military occupational specialist.” Then punch the inner row, if marked, with the inner-hole punch. The position
    for operation of the punch should be natural and easy. (See figs. 56 and 57.)
    f. Correcting Wrong Punching. If a hole has been punched incorrectly, it may be corrected by pasting gummed correction slips over the wrong punching. These are furnished in books and in two styles, one for the outer row of holes and one for the inner row. Sheets of gummed corrections with perforations dividing them into sections of three holes each are provided for the outer row, and are called "single-row card savers.” To correct an error in the outer row of holes, tear out one card saver, wet
    66
    |.R....................!••••....................................
    MR	*
    ■ . *	„	,«	5	9	13®	» j
    H* C--------H—1——-----------aasasu.----
    ■ *	Sitt«aning . Ffc.	I
    H*	U VU	-'/ /	'	•
    H| • b X	t * OKS- .	• •..	.ax?.... i?..........p ; ’•
    H • >.	j____	” •
    '<—>	..7.7.7	........ m w "■
    ^B •	KiUa:Jdng	___.______» |	«♦
    M ♦'	■ ■	' • •
    ■ •	■	• • CM
    xX ‘	in'.’"™4	—.........        Lt	!	,/ H .
    gBflK a :•	---- -----——  2. ...	K. '<■- $	in,y>r.c.l	-- .1 r
    ■ V .......	H	,-V.. S' At>	.,«•»«
    ■ *	:	”	-	... ..'"7
    IB A	.	-lEST OCCUPATION . .	. ■■■ -X	-	* >_	•	—’
    .	...--. -________■-	» *B
    ■ ’	MWl I I	.	<■<'.<■.,.£cm ■fo’.'&fb. r„j*. ‘ rt,. ,' t h>.	1'
    ——. .	.
    Hj* :
    » -     .... - •» S-XPUt. S	■»-Aftirss	Mn..	.. <
    I	■
    KS*	4Bk
    R*	’ ' '	K.	, r »	• •
    Ig* --------------- WO S.C.	'i’.-'t-r	• •
    y* ■ f ’’	e •
    ■ a
    I ft.	’• •]
    I. ' •
    TM 12-425
    103-104
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 58. APPLICATION OF SINGLE-ROW CARD SAVER.
    the gummed side and place one-half on one side of the card, with the center hole of the card saver covering the notch which was punched incorrectly. Fold the card saver over the edge of the card and press it down on the reverse side.. The card will then be remarked and repunched. The double-row card savers are always used in making any correction in an area where there are two rows of holes, whether the inner or outer row is being corrected. The illustrations show the proper method of applying both single-row and double-row card savers. (See figs. 58 and 59.)
    104.	EQUIPMENT.
    a.	General. The effective use of W.D., A.G.O. Forms Nos. 20 and 66-1 is dependent upon proper punching, sorting, selecting, and filing of the
    cards. In order to realize the maximum effective use of the qualification cards, the equipment must provide the following components:
    b.	Descript inn of Equipment. (1)
    Punching. Outer-row and inner-row punches.
    (2)	Card savers. Used for correcting wrong punching or changing an entire code section.
    (3)	Sorting. Single-needle sorting tumblers.
    (4)	Selecting. Multiple-needle selector units consisting of:
    (a)	Needle rail.
    (b)	Selector needles.
    (c)	Selector box or compartment.
    (d)	Alignment plates.
    (5)	Housing facilities. Adequate facilities for properly filing and protecting the cards.
    67
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    FIGURE 59.
    APPLICATION OF DOUBLE-ROW CARD SAVER.
    (6)	Indexing. Marginally punched guides to afford indexing the cards both alphabetically and by organization, which at the same time provide for sorting and selecting without removing the guides. Two styles of guides are furnished: alphabetic separators and guides with index tabs.
    (a) Alphabetic separators. Figures 60 and 61 show the use of the alphabetic separator cards. The two
    Name codes coincide with the Name codes on Forms Nos. 20 and 66-1. Each separator card is prepunched for the Name code corresponding to the letter printed in the upper right corner, permitting the separators to sort into proper position coincidentally with the alphabetic sequence sort of either Forms Nos. 20 or 66-1. Intersorting of alphabetic separators and qualification cards is performed as follows:
    68
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    ALPHABETIC SEPARATOR CARD.
    1.	Remove ah separator cards by sorting on the upper left corner hole of the qualification cards. Note that this corner of the separator cards is cut off, permitting them to fall clear of the qualification cards.
    2.	Place all separator cards, regardless of arrangement in front of the qualification cards.
    3.	Proceed with sequence sort of Name.
    4.	Upon completion of the sort, each separator card will be in proper position in front of a group of qualification cards which it indexes.
    FIGURE 61. ALPHABETIC SEPARATOR CARDS INDEXING
    QUALIFICATION CARDS.	69
    TM 12-425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    O O O O O O O O © o O O Q O Q O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O o o o o o o o © o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
    o
    o o o o o o
    ©
    THIS GUIDE MAY
    ALPHABETICALLY
    BE USED BOTH TO INDEX ORGANIZATIONS AND TO INDEX FORMS 20 AND €6-1 (SEE ILLUSTRATION)
    000000000000000000000000000 0-0 TOP
    o
    O
    NOTE: PLACE ONE OF THESE GUIDES AT THE BACK OF THE FILE TO PROTECT THE REAR
    CARD.
    O
    SORT INTO
    IF USED FOR ALPHABETICAL INDEXING. PUNCH THE
    ON THE TAB, VIZ: A TO D (PUNCH NAME CODE NO. 1 FOR “A”). THE GUIDES WILL THEN PROPER POSITION WHEN ALPHABETIZING THE FORMS 20 (SEE SORTING INSTRUCTIONS).
    O
    OOOOOOOOOOO
    O O O o o
    	1WIVN		o
    	|O o o o	•Mil o o o a;
    OOOOOOOOOO
    o
    O
    9 o
    Q
    O
    O
    O
    O
    O
    o
    o
    o
    FIGURE 62. GUIDE.
    (b) Guides. Figures 62 and 63 show the use of the guides. Note that they are used both to index organizations and to index qualification cards alphabetically.
    70
    TM 12-425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 63. GUIDES INDEXING QUALIFICATION CARDS.
    71
    TM 12—425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 64. 1,000-CARD SELECTOR UNIT.
    The guides provide a Name code for use with Form No. 20. Instructions covering the use of the Name code are printed on each guide. When intersorting guides and Form No. 20, follow the
    same procedure as in intersorting the separator cards, except that all guides are removed by inserting the tumbler in the extreme right corner hole of the guides and lifting the guides out.
    72
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    JB
    CARD COMPARTMENT	SORTING SPACE
    /J ■ ■ * > • / 1 JB	SELECTOR BOX
    ’	'JBSs '	kW/
    ALIGNMENT P L A T E S	LEVER OPERATING
    JWr-d’ jBERW >«« movable floor M •.	-aad^r TlOwdrMR^
    \ SELECTOR	'"""•
    \	^^^F1ECTOR	ALPHABETIC
    '	.J I\NEE£n£S '	SEPARATORS
    ' 11 B. TUMBLERS*^ WA CARD SAVERS ' /	lllU	4s'
    OUTER nTTLE PUQCHES^ IN^R HOl-E-' puww
    < /idAZZl/d	^es
    / I ^->4^*4
    ,z .
    FIGURE 65. 1,000-CARD SELECTOR UNIT OPEN SHOWING DETAIL OF EQUIPMENT.
    c. Types of Equipment. (1) 1,000-card selector unit. The different types of organizations (as distinguished from installations) require different selector and housing units. The equipment illustrated below is provided to meet these divergent
    requirements. (See figs. 64 to 73 incl.). The design of the 1,000-card selector unit is based upon the requirements of an Infantry battalion. It also meets the requirements of separately operating battalions with strength ranging from 500 to 1,000. (See e).
    73
    TM 12-425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 66. 500.CARD SELECTOR UNIT.
    (2) 500-card selector unit. The design of the 500-card selector unit is based on the requirements of separately-operating battalions and other units with strength ranging from 300 to 500. (See e).
    74
    ■
    TM 12-425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    EQUIPMENT
    COMPARTMENT	QARD
    |	OMP ART MENT
    SPRUNG TP. AX
    ... K "' • i ’-•' *BT
    \	* JF
    L	WMsR’-wImF
    .r
    GU/DES^^^L<-e\ .	■,	SELECTOR
    ___
    CAR'D SAVERSN Wk &
    \\%\	/‘ INNER HOLE
    \\%\	®	/ \ I PUNCH
    W\	OUTER HOLtf V-<
    P4NCH
    SELECTOR NEEDLES, SORriNG TUMBLER ‘
    FIGURE 67. 500-CARD SELECTOR UNIT OPEN SHOWING DETAIL OF EQUIPMENT.
    75
    TM 12-425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 68. 300-CARD SELECTOR UNIT.
    (3) 300-card selector unit. The design of the 300-card selector unit is based on the requirements of the smaller separately-operating battalions, companies and similar units with strength ranging from 100 to 300. (See e).
    76
    ■■KB X • ' •: ■	; ■ . . ■" ■ ■ X
    ,• i * ’ / -	,	«'7 71- ? ’
    A -d	. xX > 4	J,»	X.' < ''Vx' v .	'
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT	\
    CARD COMPARTMENT----------
    ■-. SORT,NG TRAY
    ■■ X
    \	.• -?i. ™	tumbler
    CARD SAVERS	" i’4"*'<
    J \ ’	\	i	/
    41V rr	|||&	r^-.. J|
    /	\
    -•■: ’.* outer hole inner hole
    PUNCH	PUNCH
    GUIDES	'	’
    FIGURE 69. 300-CARD SELECTOR UNIT OPEN SHOWING DETAIL OF EQUIPMENT.
    77
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    FIGURE 70. 100-CARD SELECTOR UNIT.
    (4) 100-card selector unit. The 100-card selector unit is designed to meet the requirements of separately-operating companies with strength not exceeding 125. (See e).
    r78
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    x
    equipment compartment
    — CARD COMPARTMENT
    x^^ilRr -«* >	** - ''	• iS
    SORTING TRAY-&^tf\.	*
    O--CARD SAVER COMPARTMENT
    w	.r>
    A i
    INNER HOLE
    PUNCH OI^ERNfOl^^^^^ r U In C_ ‘ % x-<. "';< CARD SAVERS	'•	. / A	?/f ^By>
    Ik	:
    Hk ? >	<®rcr	. i 4«UX l.
    Ik	o°
    xX,	‘' ^***r
    NX	<>.
    ^vk	■
    «a^k	■
    X/^k
    FIGURE 72. MAINTENANCE KIT.
    (5) Maintenance kit. The maintenance kit is designed solely for the use of small, separately-operating units such as platoons and detachments. It provides housing space for 20 cards, and punches and card savers required for proper maintenance of the cards in current status. (See e).
    80
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    -
    JL i
    •"SJ^sS^W®.•- ■■ -
    ? *- x * C	n,_ 1	* "-^ »^**	l" .'
    ' f . I - -ck x < '- -v. .	. .
    2\. ' *-\»t -«"s	*..	'•fisWwKSmSmgKww'■-
    /
    /	• 7
    / /
    /
    f	r-
    OUTER HOLE PUNCH
    '■	/ f
    I
    jflHH ""*■	^^***x*>^
    /	9lk	^s^**^**^_
    ’* '	’*: ’ ' :	XiBCv^^;- - -' pocket for card savers
    INNER hole punch
    'w	j9 KCJ
    *7	CARD COMPARTMENT
    JF jF

    ■ .
    FIGURE 73. MAINTENANCE KIT OPEN SHOWING DETAIL OF EQUIPMENT.
    81
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    FIGURE 74. “MODEL A” SELECTOR UNIT.
    d. Equipment for Fixed Installations. Fixed installations require a different type of equipment than any of the units illustrated above. This is known as the "Model A" selector unit. It is illustrated in figures 74 and 75.
    82
    TM 12-425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    1	I
    .y^-'•'	A- .a *
    X ^-"EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT fc‘
    t	'. ■■' '‘"aart
    !	\^gEr	SORTING TRAY WITH
    MOVABLE FLOOR
    <■
    SELECTOR n^fumelers^ NEEDLES
    \ Mz	**
    /	SELECTOR
    ALtGrJ^.UTJT PLATES L—-*	"'
    A X	.X''
    [. 4 •
    •■ /	\ '
    ( ''^-\/ I	.-A A
    'y	- .
    INNER HOLE OUTER HOLE PUNCHES PUNCH
    FIGURE 75. “MODEL A” SELECTOR UNIT OPEN SHOWING DETAIL OF EQUIPMENT.
    83
    TM 12-425
    104
    e. Equipment Types Indicated for Various Organizations and Installations. The tables on pages 84 to 89 inclusive, based upon a study of the various types of organizations and installations, indicate "Type” equipment
    17 Jun 44
    for each. They are illustrative of the functional design of the equipment to accommodate the personnel of many types of organizations and installations varying in size, function and operation.
    (1) Type equipment indicated for various field organizations.
    		Equipment capacity
    Type of organization	1,000 cards	500 cards	300 cards	Maintenance kit
    Brigades (Engr. Special) 	 Divisions: Airborne— Hq. and Special Troops 	 Engr. Bn	 AA Bn	 Div. Arty. Hq. and Service Troops 	 Glider Arty. Bns. (2) 	 Parachute Arty. Bn	 Inf. Parachute Regt., Hq. and Serv. Troops Inf. Parachute Bns. (3) 	 Inf. Glider Regts. (2), Hq. and Serv. Troops 	 Inf. Glider Bns. (4) 		7 L 4	1 1 1 2 1 1 3	3 1 2
    Total per Airborne Division 		5	9	3
    Divisions: Armored— Hq. and Special Troops		1 1 1 3 3 1	3 1	1	1
    Cav. Ren. Squadron
    Ener. Bn
    Tank Bns. (3)
    Inf. Bns. (3)
    Div. Arty. Hq
    Arty. Bns. (3)
    Div. Trains—Hq. Co., M.P. Plat	 Div. Trains Ord. Maint. fin
    Div. Trains Med. Bn
    Total per Armored Division
    	10	4	1	1

    84
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    Type of organization	Equipment capacity
    	1.000 cards	500 cards	300 cards	Maintenance kit
    Divisions: Cavalry— Hq. and Special Troops		1
    Ren. Squadron 		1
    Engr. Squadron 			1
    Med. Squadron			1
    Q. M. Squadron 			1
    2 Brigades, Hq. and Special Troops				2
    4 Cavalry R.egts. Hq. and Special Troops	 8 Rifle Squadrons 			4 8
    Div. Arty. Hq. and Hq. Btry				1
    Arty. Bns. 75-MM (2) 		2
    Arty. Bns. 105-MM (1) 		1

    Total per Cavalry Division 		5	15	3

    Divisions: Infantry—
    Hq. and Special Troops, Ren. Troop, Attached Med. and Chap		1
    Engr. Bn		1
    Med. Bn			1
    Inf. Regts. (3) Hq. and Sp. Troops			3
    Inf. Bns. (9) 		9
    Div. Arty. Hq. and Hq. Btry				1
    Arty. Bns. 105-MM (3) 	 Arty. Bns. 155-MM (1) 			3 1

    Total per Infantry Division 		11	8	1

    Divisions: Light—
    Hq. and Special Troops 		1
    11	I Inf. Regts. (3) Hq. and Special Troops	 Inf. Bns. (9) 		9	•	3
    Div. Arty. Hq. Det. and A-T Btry				1
    Arty. Bns. 75-MM (3) 			3
    Arty. Bns. AAA (1) 				1
    Engr. Bn			1
    Med. Bn				1

    Total per Light Division				10	4	6
    85
    TM 12-425
    104
    17 Jun 44
    			~ 	—		;
    			Equipment capacity
    	Type of organization	1,000	500	300	Maintenance
    		cards	cards	cards	kit
    Hospitals:	Field, Evacuation, Surgical, etc. (Requirements
    	are based on maximum strength, including
    	detachment of patients.)
    Regiments:	(Based on Grouping Hq. and Special Troops,
    	Equipping Battalions or Squadrons Sepa-
    	rately.)—
    	Cavalry—Horse 		1	2
    	Cavalry—Mechanized 				10
    	Coast Artillery, Harbor Defense, Type A			4
    	Coast Artillery, Harbor Defense, Type B 			3
    	Coast Artillery, Harbor Defense, Type C			5
    	Coast Artillery, 155-MM Gun Mobile 			4
    	Coast Artillery, AA Semimobile 		2	1	1
    	Engr. General Service 		2		1
    	Engr. Special Service 		2		1
    	Engr. Aviation 				3	1
    	Infantry		3	1
    	Infantry (with 57-MM A-T Co.) 		3	1
    	Infantry Glider 		2	1
    	Infantry Parachute 			4
    	Medical 			2	1
    	Q. M. Truck			3	1
    	Signal Aircraft Warning 2 School or Aca-
    	demic			(None)	1
    	Training 				(None)
    (2) Type equipment indicated for small separate organizations. The following table lists many types of small organizations, most of which operate as separate units. The criterion of equipment indicated for
    such organizations is whether or not they handle their own administration. If so, they maintain their own qualification cards and have use for the selector equipment.
    Equipment capacity
    Type of organization
    100 cards
    Maintenance kit
    Batteries: Coast Artillery
    AA Artillery Defense Command
    Harbor Defense
    Companies: Armored Crronp E-Tcj and Hcj Co			X
    Ghemmal VFarfare			X
    Zhemical VFarfarp Aviation			X
    Engineer			X
    Medical			X
    Ordnance			X
    Ordnance, Aviation 		X
    86
    X
    X
    X
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    104
    Equipment capacity
    Type of organization
    Maintenance
    100 cards
    Quartermaster ...........................................................
    Quartermaster, Aviation .................................................
    Signal, Aviation ........................................................
    Tank and Tank Destroyer ..................................................
    Transportation Corps .....................................................
    Infantry (Hq. and Hq. Co., Infantry Airborne Brigade).....................
    Detachments—No T/O:
    Hq. and Hq. Det., Special Troops .........................................
    Provisional Engineer ......................................................
    Medical...................................................................
    Army Postal Service.......................................................
    Service Command ..........................................................
    Q. M. Sterilization Bn., Hq. and Hq. Det..................................
    Detachments—T/O:
    Hq. and Hq. Det. Special Troops, Army......................................
    Coast Artillery ..........................................................
    Defense Command Subsector .....................................
    Engineer .................................................................
    Medical .................................................................i
    Ordnance ..............................................................  1
    Quartermaster .............................................................
    Tank ......................................................................
    Transportation Corps ......................................................
    AAF .......................................................................
    Groups:
    Field Service Group, Office Chief of Transportation .......................
    Headquarters:
    Fighter Group, AAF ........................................................
    Bombardment Group, AAF.....................................................
    Heavy Bombardment Processing, AAF..........................................
    Fighter Bomber Group, AAF ................................................
    Night Fighter Operational Training Group, AAF ............................
    Photo-Charting Group, AAF ................................................
    Photo-Reconnaisance Group, AAF ............................................
    Medical Dept. Concentration Center .......................................
    Signal Service (Army) C. B. I.............................................
    Flying Training Wing, AAF ................................................
    Platoons (separate) :
    Engineer .................................................................
    Engineer, Aviation .......................................................
    Field Artillery ..........................................................
    Medical Hospital Ship.....................................................
    Quartermaster .............................................................
    Quartermaster, Aviation ..................................................
    Post Office: (Base) .............................................................
    Section: Communications Zone ....................................................
    Squads: Ordnance Bomb Disposal (separate) .......................................
    Squadrons: AAF ...................................................................
    X X X X X
    X
    X X
    X X
    X
    X X X X X X X X X X
    X X X X X X X X X
    X X X X X X X X
    X
    87
    X
    X
    X
    X
    X
    X
    X
    X
    17 Jun 44
    'TM 12-425
    104
    Equipment capacity
    Type of organization	100 cards	Maintenance kit
    Team- Signal Center				X
    Troops: Quartermaster	.			X
    Cavalry					X
    Units: Machine Records	.			X
    Signal			X
    AAF Training Film Preparation			X
    Engineer			X	X
    Medical				X
    		-
    (3) Type equipment indicated for certain installations and activities. The table below lists certain installations and activities the function and operation of which are such that there is some question as to what, if any, selector equipment is indicated. A study
    of the strength of these installations and activities shows that, if equipment is indicated, the card capacities shown in the table will probably accommodate their personnel.
    Type of installation or activity	Equipment capacity
    	100 cards	Maintenance kit
    Centers: Desert Training—Hq. Communications Zone 	 Ona rtermaster Marker			X	X
    Relocation (S CII )	.				X
    Service Command Distribution			X
    Training ASF (Hq )			X
    Commands: A nfiAirrrn ft Command W D C. Ho Rtrv			X
    A AF Trainmn ommancl T-To And FTci Scmadron r Detachments^		X
    Fpn 1 qremenr And School Command ACtF			X
    Service Command Tin its			X	X
    Miscellaneous—AAF: Army Airways Communications System—Regional Control Headquarters	 Airways Communications System—Regional Control Headquarters	 Miscellaneous—ASF: ManntArhirina Arsenals			X	x
    Denote* Ad infant Creneral			X
    Fn ameer			X	X
    Medical			X
    Ordnance			X	X
    Ouarferma ster			X
    Signal			X	X
    T^icnen^Arv IT S Armv			X
    xjUIlUl. dl Jl_x Io LJCllocLl V j	. Itliirj 	 ct-fic't-c • A rtviFnrcpc Fpeniifina And TndnCflon ( S.(.. 1J. ) 		X	X
    LylSUllClS. ZklUlCCJ. lUHCo luXiuiLiiig aim iiiuitcnuu		 Fnameer			X	X
    Procurement		X	X
    88
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12—425
    104
    Type of installation or activity
    Divisions: Engineer .......................
    Holding and Reconsignment Points ..........
    Laboratories ..............................
    Recreational Areas ........................
    S. C. U., Ordnance Service Command Shops.
    District Transportation Offices ...........
    Miscellaneous War Department:
    Army Experiment Station ...................
    Schools—ASF:
    Bakers and cooks (incl. branches) .........
    Engineer ..................................
    Ordnance Civilian .........................
    Signal Corps ..............................
    Special Service ...........................
    Transportation Corps ......................
    War Department Contract (civilian) ........
    Equipment capacity
    100 cards	Maintenance kit
    X	X
    X
    X	X
    	X
    	X
    X	X
    X	X
    x
    X
    X
    X
    X
    X
    (4) Type equipment indicated for fixed installations. Fixed installations are equipped with "Model A" selectors on the basis of 1 unit per 5,000 authorized personnel or maximum capacity. These installations include the following:
    (d) Centers: Reception.
    Replacement Training.
    Tank Destroyer.
    Training.
    Unit Training.
    Basic Training.
    (&) Commands: Service Commands.
    Air Service.
    AAF Materiel.
    Antiaircraft.
    AAF Applied Tactics.
    AAF Training. Defense.
    Engr. Amphibian.
    (c)	Depots: AAF Replacement.
    AGF Replacement. ASF Replacement.
    (d)	Manufacturing arsenals.
    (e)	Hospitals: General (named).
    Convalescent.
    Station, Comm. Zone 500 and 750 beds.
    Post, camp, or station. (Part of station complement but equipped separately.)
    (/) Ports of embarkation.
    (g) Prisoner-of-war camps.
    (//) Staging areas.
    (/) U. S. Disciplinary barracks.
    (j) Terminals.
    (£) Proving grounds.
    (/) Schools (where capacity or authorized strength is more than 500 men, as follows): AGF—Armored, Cav., CA, FA, Inf., TD, OCS.
    ASF—AF, Army Exch. Serv., CWS, SC (Civilian and industrial), Engr., Fin., Ord., Ord. Automotive, PMG, QM, SC, TC, OCS.
    War Dept. — USMA, CGS, MIL INT., AWC.
    (w) Station complements.
    (?/) Companies: Hq. and Hq. Co. War Dept. Service Group.
    Hq. and Hq. Co. Armored Command.
    (c) Detachments: Hq. and Hq. Det. Alaska Defense Command.
    Hq. AAF Training Detachments.
    (p)	Group: Proving Ground Group, AAF
    (q)	Service Organizations: Signal Security Service. (Arlington, Virginia).
    (r)	Squadrons: AAF Base Hq. and Air Base Squadron.
    89
    TM 12-425
    105
    105. SORTING AND SELECTING.
    a. General. The marginal punch card sorting system serves an important function in the qualification phase of the Army Personnel System. That function is to locate rapidly officers or enlisted men whose experience and training qualify them for specific assignments.
    (1)	Use of sorting and selecting. It is essential that effective use be made of the sorting and selecting features of the system so that the maximum effectiveness of the qualification cards may be realized.
    (2)	Selection. The process of multiple-needle selection produces, with a minimum of time and effort, the cards of officers or enlisted men who have specific qualifications.
    (3)	Sorting. Use of single-needle sorting quickly arranges the qualification cards in predetermined order. This process is useful in many ways. Some of the more important uses of single-needle sorting are shown below.
    (d) Arranging the cards in alphabetical order.
    17 Jun 44
    (£) Placing the cards in numerical order by Specification Serial Number (for Inventory of Specialists, etc.).
    (c) Sorting the cards in order according to level of education.
    (y/) Arranging the cards according to A.G.C.T. grades.
    (4)	Sorting and selecting procedure. The actual operations of sorting and selecting involve a minimum of technique. It is believed that these operations can be learned in a short time by the application of common sense and a little practice. Every Classification and Unit Personnel Officer should be thoroughly familiar with the process and should see to it that every classification specialist under his supervision has an up-to-date, thorough, and practical knowledge of the procedure.
    (5)	Types of sorts provided. There follows a list of the various qualifications which are coded to provide sorting and selecting. This list shows the many practical uses of the sorting system.
    SOLDIER’S QUALIFICATION CARD, W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 20
    Code section	Location (edge)	Direct sort	Selective sort	Sequence sort
    ■	 Name 	 Marital status 	 Education 		Bottom Top Left	X X	X	X
    Languages 	 Entertainment 		Bottom Left	X
    Main civilian occupation 		Right		X	X
    Second-best civilian occupation 	 Service command of enlistment or induction		Right Top	X	X	X
    Hobbies 		Left		X	X
    Qualified sport 		Left		X	X
    Tests (type) 	 Tests (A.G.C.T. grade) 		Left Left	X	X	X
    Leadership 	 Previous military experience 	 Service schools 	 Assignment limitations 	 Military occupational specialist 		Left Top Right Bottom Top	X . X X	X	X
    Potential 	 Potential NCO 	 Other duties 	 Current oversea service 	 Month and year of enlistment or induction		Top Top Top Bottom Bottom	X X X	X	X
    90
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    OFFICER’S AND WARRANT OFFICER’S QUALIFICATION CARD, W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 66-1
    Code section	Location (edge)	Direct sort	Selective sort	Sequence sort
    Name 	 					x
    Arm or service 		Top		x
    Component		Top	x
    Date of birth 				x
    War service 		Top	x
    C.C.C. service		Top	x
    Assignment limitations 		Bottom	x
    Foreign residence		Top
    Grade 		Top	X		X
    Type of duty 				Top	X
    Special service schools 		Right		X	X
    General service schools 		Top	X
    Languages		Top	X
    Marital status 		Left	X
    Education 		Left			x
    Participating sports		Bottom	X
    Active hobbies 		Bottom	x
    Main civilian occupation 			Right		x	x
    Secondary civilian occupation 		Right		X
    Military specialties (outer row) 		Left		x	x
    Military specialties (inner row) 		Left		X
    (6) Relationship of the three types of sorts to the three types of codes is illustrated in following table:
    TYPE OF CODE	TYPE OF SORT PROVIDED
    Direct code	Direct Sort
    Sequence code (7—4—2—1)	Sequence Sort (including Break-down Sort)
    Selective Code (SF-7-4-2-1-0)	Selective Sort and Sequence Sort
    FIGURE 76.
    91
    TM 12-425
    105
    b. Selective Sorting Procedure. (See figs. 76 to 140 incl.). (1) Step 1. Loading selector.
    (d) Lay a single card on the desk so that the desired code section is at the top. (See fig. 76.)
    (b) Align the needle rail.
    17 Jun 44
    1.	Aluminum selector.
    (a)	Right end of needle rail flush with right edge of card.
    (b)	Numbers under holes visible.
    (c)	Line up scored lines on needle rail with centers of holes.
    FIGURE 77.
    92
    FIGURE 78.
    T7 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 79.
    2. Wood or plastic selector. (See figs. 78 and 79.) Raise metal clip so numbers under holes can be read through here. Line up extreme right hole with first numbered hole in card.
    93
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 80.
    (r) Insert selector needles. (See fig. 80.) Start with highest digit, work left to right. (d) Fasten selector needles in place.
    94
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 81.
    1. Aluminum selector. (See figs. 81 and 82.) Lift needle rail straight up to let needles fall in place.
    95
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 82.
    Turn knurled knob to fasten needles in position.
    96
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 83.
    2. Wood or plastic selector. (See figs. 83 and 84.) Push needles in until heads rest against needle rail..
    97
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 84.
    Lower metal clip.
    FIGURE 85.
    () One inch of needles resting in notches.
    110
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 105.
    FIGURE 106.
    (c) Push cards forward onto needles.
    (d) Push needles through cards.
    I I I
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 107.
    () Remove selector needles.
    FIGURE 120.
    I 19
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-125
    105
    FIGURE 121.
    (c) Replace rejected cards in file.
    120
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 122.
    (d) Using "Model A” selector, lay aside on table for later refiling.
    FIGURE 123.
    (e) Check selected cards to be sure all show the desired qualifications.
    121
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 124.
    (9) Repeat the above procedure with additional groups of cards until the desired qualifications have been selected from the entire file. Place new group of cards in selector compartment and proceed as above.
    FIGURE 125.
    122
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 126.
    (10) Selecting from inner row of holes, (a)	Step	(c)	Step	3.	Repeat	Step	3.
    1. Repeat Step 1.	(d)	Step	4.	Repeat	Step	4.
    (b) Step 2. Positioning alignment plates.	Set	(e)	Step	3.	Repeat	Step	5.
    plates in position for inner row selection.
    FIGURE 127.
    123
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44

    FIGURE 128.
    (/) Step 6. Spreading the cards.
    1. Spread cards along front half of selector needles.
    2. Lower the movable floor.
    124
    FIGURE 129,
    MODEl 'A" PUSH IN.	, ld00 CARD SELECTOR-MOVE LEVER TO RIGHT.
    NO MOVABLE FLOOR
    17 Jun 44	TM 12_l25
    105
    FIGURE 130.
    FIGURE 131.
    (Note position of selected cards.)
    125
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 133.
    (") Step 7. Inserting locking needle. Insert locking needle (single selector needle) in upper right corner holes of cards.
    1. Locking needle rests in alignment plate notches.
    2. Push these cards to the right to be sure locking needle catches them.
    126
    FIGURE 132.
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12—125
    105
    FIGURE 134.
    3. • Operating the 500-card selector, first raise the selector so that needles are parallel with desk, hold in position with left hand, insert locking needle with right hand.
    FIGURE 135.
    (Z?) Step 8. Removing selector needles.
    1. Hold locking needle in position. Remove selector and lay aside.
    127
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 136.
    2. Detail of removing selector from 500-card selector unit. No support from front alignment plate.
    FIGURE 137.
    (?) Step 9- Completing selection. 1. Spread cards along locking needle.
    128
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 138.
    129
    TM 12-425
    L105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 139.
    2. Raise locking needle to permit selected cards to fall clear. Selected cards remain in selector box.
    130
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 140.
    FIGURE 141.
    ILLUSTRATING SORTING SPACE PROVIDED IN SELECTOR UNITS.
    3. Remove locking needle.
    4. Replace rejected cards in file. (See figs.
    120, 121, and 122.)
    3. Check selected cards to be sure all show desired qualifications. Lay these cards aside. (See fig. 123.)
    (/) Repeat above procedure with additional groups of cards until the desired qualifications have been selected from the entire file.
    (11) Special selecting procedure. Selection of "Month of enlistment or induction” requires special procedure because the coding of 12 months in a single code field exceeds the normal limit of 9. This procedure of selecting each of the 12 months is described in the following table.
    c. Single Needle Sorting Procedure.
    No alignment plates are required for single needle sorting. All that is required is the sorting tumbler and an adequate sorting tray or compartment. Each of the selector units provides adequate sorting space, as shown in figure 141.
    (1) There are three fundamentals of single-needle sorting.
    (a)	Do not attempt to sort too many cards. Normally, a group of cards 2 inches in thickness (about 175 cards) is the maximum number to be sorted.
    (b)	Grasp the tumbler handle firmly. Notice the palm of the hand under the handle in figure 142.
    131
    \	I	1
    MOOH "A-- SHfCTOK 0Nlr. 1000-CARD SELECTOR UNIT	sJkToF'Zn'T
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    Months	Insert needles in holes of month field		Result
    January 	 February 	 March 	 April 	 May 	 June 	 My	 August 	 September 	 October	 November 	 December 		SF and SF and 1 and SF and 1	and 2	and SF and 1	and 2	and 1, 2, 4 and 1, 4,	1		 2 2 	 4 	 4 	 4	 7 	 7 7 	 ind 7 	 7 	 ind 7 		January cards will drop. February cards will drop. March and October cards will drop. Take these and insert single needle in No. 7 hole. .October cards will drop—cards remaining on needle will be March. April cards will drop. May and December cards will drop. Take these, and insert a single needle in the No. 7 hole. December cards will drop. May cards will remain on needle. June cards will drop. July cards will drop. ’ August, October, and December cards	will	drop.	Take these and insert	single	needle in the	No.	2 hole.	October cards will	drop.	(Set aside.)	Take remaining cards and insert	single	needle in the	No.	4 hole.	De- cember cards will drop. August cards will remain on needle. September and October cards will drop. Take these and insert single needle in the No. 1 hole. October cards will drop. September cards will remain on needle. October cards will drop. November and December cards will drop. Take these and insert single needle in the No. 1 hole. December cards will drop. November cards will remain on needle. December cards will drop.
    FIGURE 143. NOT THIS.
    132
    FIGURE 142. THIS.
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 144. IF TILTED DOWNWARD, CARDS FALL OFF END OF TUMBLER.
    (c)	Keep the tumbler parallel with the desk. If tilted downward, this happens; cards fall off end of tumbler.
    133
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 145. IF TILTED UPWARD, THIS HAPPENS; CARDS BIND TOGETHER AND WILL NOT DROP.
    (z/) Two things will help keep the tumbler parallel with the desk.
    1. Grasping the tumbler handle firmly, keeping palm of hand underneath the handle. (See fig. 142.)
    134
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 146. START OF REMOVING REJECTED CARDS.
    2. Moving the arm from the shoulder in a natural arc to the right and away, rather than controlling the tumbler with wrist movements. (See figs. 146 and 147.)
    135
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 147. FINISH OF REMOVING REJECTED CARDS.
    136
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 148. CARDS IN SORTING POSITION.
    FIGURE 149.
    (2)	Sorting procedure, (a) Step 1. Setting the cards in sorting position.
    1.	Remove from the file a group of cards not more than 2 inches in thickness (about 175 cards). Set cards in sorting tray so that code section to be sorted is at the top.
    2.	With left hand, align cards against right edge of sorting tray.
    3.	Move left hand along top of cards and place left thumb adjacent to first position to be sorted. Compress cards with left hand.
    (b)	Step 2. Inserting the tumbler.
    1.	Grasp tumbler firmly in right hand. Extend index finger approximately 1 inch along needle.
    137
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 150.
    2. Insert the tumbler in the first position to be sorted, until right index finger is against front card.
    138
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 151.
    3. Withdraw right index finger from needle. This leaves an inch of needle space between front card and tumbler handle.
    139
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 152.
    (c)	Step 3. Moving tumbler to left oblique position.
    1.	Slide left hand around to bottom left edge of cards.
    2.	Extend left index finger firmly along left
    edge of cards and around, last card with thumb pressed against the face of the first card.
    3.	Press tumbler handle horizontally to left until cards bend.
    140
    TM 12—425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 153.
    (d)	Step 4. Spreading the cards.
    1.	Compress cards tightly between thumb and fingers of left hand.
    2.	Bring tumbler back toward original position until firm resistance is felt.
    3.	Note fan-shape of cards..
    141
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 154.
    (e)	Step 3. Releasing the cards.
    1.	Without raising cards and while the tumbler is still under stress quickly release pressure of left hand.
    2.	Note how cards have separated.
    | 142
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 155. >
    (/) Step 6. Removing rejected cards.
    1.	Lift the tumbler and impaled cards straight up until cards clear right edge of sorting tray. Hold the tumbler still in this position for a second or two to permit all cards to drop.
    143
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 156.
    2. Carry tumbler and rejected cards slowly away to the right. The right edge of the sorting tray will catch and retard the "stragglers.”
    144
    TM 12-425
    105
    ]7 Jun 44
    FIGURE 157.
    (g) Step 7. Disposition of cards.
    1.	The cards remaining in the sorting tray are sorted cards.
    2.	Cards remaining on the tumbler are rejected cards.
    3.	Each group is disposed of according to the type of sorting being performed, whether direct, sequence or break-down sorting. Each of these types of sort is described below.
    (3)	Sorting Code sections near left side of card. Sorting of code sections near the left side of the card requires somewhat different procedure. This is due to the fact that there is insufficient card space between the left edge and the tumbler to permit the cards to be spread into the shape of a fan. (See fig. 157.) This is particularly true of code sections along the right and left edges, such as "A.G.C.T. grade,” "Entertainment,” "Service schools.” To sort in these positions, the only difference in procedure lies in Step 4.
    145
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 158.
    (a) Instead of moving the tumbler horizontally to the left, push the tumbler handle down, pointing the needle toward the ceiling.
    146
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 159.
    (Z») Place the third and fourth fingers of the left hand underneath the bottom edges of the cards and compress the cards tightly between those fingers and the thumb.
    147
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 160.
    (c) Bring the tumbler back to its original horizontal position, thus fanning the cards in a vertical instead of a horizontal plane.
    (4)	Direct sort. The direct sort is, of course, the simplest type of sorting. It consists simply of inserting the tumbler in a position which has been designated as a direct code and performing a single sort.
    (5)	Multiple direct sort. The multiple direct sort
    uses more than one needle for a combination of direct sorts in code sections located on one edge of the card. It is entirely practical, for instance, to select simultaneously enlisted men who possess leadership qualities and who have had experience in theatrical entertainment. This can be accomplished either with the selector or with two single needles.
    START HERE
    FINISH HERE
    I 2 TENS
    UNITS

    FIGURE 161. THE PROCESS OF SEQUENCE SORTING.
    d. Sequence Sorting. The process of sorting a group of cards into their coded order is called "sequence sorting.” (Normally, this places the cards in numerical order.) Sequence sorting is always done in reverse order, starting with the lowest code position and sorting successively to the left through the
    highest coded position in the code section. Sequence sorting is done with the single needle tumbler, operating procedure for which is shown in c above. Only as many cards can be sequence-sorted at a time as can be conveniently held in one hand.
    148
    TM 12-42 5
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 162.
    (1 ) hi sequence sorting, it is important to remember three things, (a) After each sort, the cards sorted out are placed at the back of those remaining on the tumbler.
    (b) The entire group of cards must be kept together throughout the process.
    (c) The cards must be kept in the order in which they fall during each sorting operation. If a card falls
    out of position, it is laid aside and placed in proper order manually after completion of the sort.
    (2)	Sequence sorting procedure, (a) Sort first in the No. 1 position of the units field.
    1.	Hold tumbler and rejected cards.
    2.	With left hand gather sorted cards—jog them against right edge of tray.
    149
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 163.
    3.	Place sorted cards at the back of cards on tumbler.
    4.	Place tumbler in groove formed by notches in sorted cards.
    FIGURE 164.
    (b) Bring entire group together.
    1. Withdraw tumbler, insert in No. 2 position of units field.
    2. Repeat above operation.
    150
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 165.
    TM 12-425
    105
    (c) Repeat this process through the No. 4 and No. 7 positions of the units field and follow the same procedure with the No. 1, 2, 4, and 7 positions of each succeeding code field to the left, through the highest coded position in the code section. (In the code section for Military Occupational Specialist, the No. 2, 4, and 7 positions of the thousands field are not coded; hence, No. 1 is the highest coded position.)
    (<7) When the sequence sort has been completed the cards will be arranged in their coded sequence. Thus, in a numerical code, the cards coded for No. 1 will be at the front and the highest numbered card will be at the back. (See figure 165).
    1. Ciphers automatically sort into position because being the only number not coded, they never sort out. Thus, in putting all sorted cards at the back of the group, ciphers remain in front.
    2. Figure 166 illustrates what occurs in the sequence sort of a numerical digit group.
    Typical Positions of Cards Before Start of Sequence Sort.
    Sorting No. I Position
    No. I q.nd all combinations involving No. I have dropped off tumbler and have been placed behind remaining cards.
    Sorting No. 2 Position
    No. 2 and all combinations' involving No. 2 have, dropped' off tumbler and have been placed behind remaining cards.
    Sorting No. 4 Position
    No. ,4 and all Combinations involving No. 4 have dropped off tumbler and have been placed behind remaining cards-.
    Sorting No. 7 Position
    No. 7 and all combinations involving No. 7 have dropped off tumbler and have been placed behind * remaining--cards.
    FIGURE 166.
    (3) Sequence sorting a selective code. The only sequence code section on the soldier’s qualification card is that for Name. Sequence sorting, however, is applicable to numerical selective code sections and it is important that the procedure be thoroughly under
    stood. Sequence sorting a selective code is accomplished in the same manner as explained above, except that the cipher and SF in each digit are disregarded. (See fig. 167).
    151
    Sort from the right to left (sequence sort) by Education (units) ; then A.G.C.T. grade (tens) and last, Main Civilian Occupation (hundreds, thousands, and ten-thousands.)
    The completed sort places Main Civilian Occupa-
    tions in numerical order, the A.G.C.T. grades within each occupation in numerical order and the various levels of education in order by A.G.C.T. grades within each occupation. The tabulation illustrated in figure 169 can readily be prepared from the cards.
    152
    TM 12-425	17 Jun 44
    105
    SKIP THESE
    SF 7	4	2	1 OSF 742 1OSF 742	1 O J' --------
    HUNDREDS	TENS	UNITS	ft/	U>
    (27) MILITARY OCCUPATIONAL SPECIALIST	/ft
    FIGURE 167.
    (4) Sequence sorting main civilian occupation. (6) Multiple sequence sort. This type of sorting When it is necessary to- select a group of various code	is used when it is necessary to sort cards into senumbers, such as Main Civilian Occupation, use of	quence according to two or more different classifica-
    the sequence sort is of particular advantage. For	tions. One of the classifications	is the major, and	one
    example, suppose it is necessary to find all enlisted	is the minor. Those in between	are "submajors.”	To
    men whose main civilian occupations are coded by get the final result, always sort first through the minor the specification serial Nos. 029, 033, 126, 218, 369,	and finish with the major. For	example, assume	that
    and 388. All of the cards should be sorted into nu-	the cards are to be sorted into sequence by:
    merical order by specification serial numbers (a se-	First, Main Civilian Occupation
    quence sort). Then each of the specification serial	(Major classification)
    numbers above will be in its respective numerical po-	Second, A.G.C.T. Grade
    sition and all cards for each number will be	(Submajor classification)
    together.	Third, Education
    (5) Break-doivn sort. If there are more cards to	(Minor classification)
    be sequence sorted than can be conveniently handled Consider the three classifications as one number at one time (approximately 175 cards), the break- and sort as one code section consisting of 5 digits, down sort described below should be carried out. thus:
    (ten] THOUS.J	[	(THOUSANDS,	1	(HUNDREDS)	[	(TENS)	[	I (UNITS )
    ---------- -------------------------------------------------------------ir-----------------------——-------------1
    SF	7	4	2	I	O SF 7	4	2	«	OSF 7	4	2	I	O	SF 4	2	1 SF1I 4	2	1	7
    (l.HA“bB)b9Tr^ -----,LL,T(8> EOUC-AV.ON-—I
    s F	7	4	2	1	OSF7	4	2	I	OSF7	4	2	1	O
    HUNDREDS	TENS	UNITS	NT
    TOP ROW - ( 1 3) MAIN CIVILIAN OCCUPATION.	BOTTOM ROW - ( 1 4) 2ND BEST
    FIGURE 168.
    KAIN	NO. A. 0. C. I.___EDUCATION ________________
    CIVILIAN CP GRADE I L’O. OF KEN NOSS 0. S. U.S. I COLD. P. 0. T. ,E. OR i. occupation, ken
    014	5	11	1
    II 1	1
    /	III 2	’ll
    IV 1	1
    050	1	III	1	1
    055	6	1	2	1	1
    Il	2	2
    III	1	1
    IV	1	1
    096	2	III	2	11
    FIGURE 169.
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 170.
    e. Break-down Sorting. If there are too many cards to sort at one time, break the cards into stacks, using the break-down sort, by the major classification "Main civilian occupation.” (See (1) below.) This type of sorting is used only when there are more cards to be sequence-sorted than it is practical to handle at one time. Its function is to break down a large group of cards into a series of smaller groups, each of which can be sequence sorted. It is, therefore, preliminary to the sequence sort when it is required. The break-down sorting process is directly opposite the sequence sorting process in that in break-down sorting the operation is from the highest to the lowest code position (left to right)
    and the cards resulting from each sort are placed in separate stacks. Assume that a group of 500 qualification cards are to be sequence-sorted into alphabetical order. The Name code section contains two fields, tens and units. Since a group of 500 cards is too large to sequence-sort at one operation, the following break-down sorting procedure will arrange the cards for sequence sorting:
    (1) Break-down sorting procedure, (a) Place the entire group of cards to the left of the sorting tray. Take a convenient handful (not more than 2 inches in thickness) from the top of the group; place them in the sorting tray and align for sorting.
    153
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 171.
    (b) Major Break-down.
    1. Sort through No. 7 in the tens field.
    Result: The 70’s, 80’s, and 90’s will drop out. These are code numbers 70 through 99. Place them in stack No. 5 as shown.
    FIGURE 172.
    154
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 173.
    2. Sort through No. 4 in the tens field. Result: The 40’s, 50’s and 60’s will drop out. These are code numbers 40 through 69. Place them in stack No. 4. (See fig. 174.)
    FIGURE 174.
    155
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 175.
    . 3. Sort through No. 2 in the tens field.
    Result: The 20’s, and 30’s will drop out.
    These are code numbers 20 through 39. Place them in stack No. 3. (See fig. 176.)
    FIGURE 176.
    156
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 177.
    4. Sort through No. 1 in the tens field.
    Result: The 10’s will drop out. These are code numbers 10 through 19. Place them in stack No. 4 as shown in figure 178. The cards coded for numbers less than 10, or 1 through 9, will remain on the tumbler. Place these in stack No. 1 as shown in figure 179.
    FIGURE 178.
    157
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 179.
    5. Take a second convenient handful of cards from the unsorted stack and repeat the above operations. Continue until the unsorted stack of cards has been transformed into the five major break-down stacks.
    FIGURE 180.
    158
    17 Jun 44	TM 12-425
    105
    FIGURE 181.
    (c) Subbreak-down of major break-down. If one or more of the major break-down stacks remains too large to be sequence-sorted, make a subbreak-down sort as follows:
    FIGURE 182.
    1. Assume that stack No. 5 is still too large. Take a convenient handful from the stack and sort through 2 in the tens field.
    Result: The 90 s will drop out—code numbers 90 through 99. Place these in stack No. 8. (See fig. 183).
    159
    TM 12-125
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 183.
    FIGURE 184.
    2. Sort through 1 in the tens field.
    Result: The 80’s will drop out—code numbers 80 through 89. (See fig. 185.) Place these in stack No. 7. The 70’s remain on the tumbler. Place these
    in stack No. 6. (See fig. 186.)
    160
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 185.
    FIGURE 186.
    FIGURE 187.
    3. If there are cards still remaining in stack No. 5, repeat the above operations until stack No. 5 has been transformed into stacks Nos. 6, 7, and 8.
    161
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 188.
    (<7) Final Sequence Sort.
    1.	Beginning with stack No. 8, sort first through 1 in the units field, place the cards that sort out at the back of the group, and continue sorting through each position to the left through 7 in the units field. (See fig. 188). These cards, coded 90 to 99, are now in sequence. Place them face up in a new stack to the left of the sorting tray. (See fig. 189.)
    FIGURE 189.
    162
    TM 12-425
    105
    17 Jun 44
    FIGURE 190.
    2.	Sequence-sort stack No. 7 and place it face up on the top of the completed stack. (See fig. 190.)
    3.	Sequence-sort stack No. 6 and place it face up on top of the completed stack. (See fig. 191.)
    4.	Proceed with sequence-sorting stacks 4, 3, 2, and 1. The final result is that the entire group of cards is now in numerical order, from 0 to 99. (See fig. 192.)
    FIGURE 191.
    FIGURE 192.
    163
    TM 12-425
    17 Jun 44
    Appendix I
    ARMS AND SERVICES WITH CODE NVMRERS
    Adjutant General’s Department ............... 01
    Aide to General Officer...................... 02
    Air Corps.................................... 03
    Armored Force ............................... 04
    Army Mine Planter Service ................... 05
    Cavalry ..................,.................. 06
    Chaplain ..................................   07
    Chemical Warfare Service .................... 08
    Coast Artillery Corps ....................... 09
    Corps of Engineers........................... 10
    Field Artillery.............................. 11
    Finance Department .......................... 12
    General Staff Corps.......................... 13
    Infantry ..................................... 14
    Inspector General’s Department............... 15
    Judge Advocate General’s Department ......... 16
    Medical Corps................................ 17
    Dental Corps................................. 18
    Veterinary Corps ............................ 19
    Medical Administrative Corps .................. 20
    Army Nurse Corps .............................. 21
    Contract Surgeon............................... 22
    Sanitary Corps ................................ 23
    Military Intelligence ......................... 24
    Military Police................................ 25
    National Guard Bureau ......................... 26
    Ordnance Department............................ 27
    Quartermaster Corps............................ 28
    Signal Corps .................................. 29
    Specialist Corps..............................  30
    Warrant Officer................................ 31
    United States Military Academy................. 32
    Transportation Corps .......................... 33
    Medical Dept., Physical Therapy Aides.......... 34
    Medical Dept., Dietitians ..................... 35
    Pharmacy Corps ................................ 36
    Women’s Army Corps ............................ 37
    164
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    Appendix II
    NAME CODE FOR OFFICERS AND ENLISTED PERSONNEL
    A
    Aa to Al.........................,. 1
    Am to Aq........................... 2
    Ar to Az........................... 3
    B
    Baa to	Baq ....................... 4
    Bar to	Bd ........................ 5
    Bea to	Bern ..................... 6
    Ben to	Bh........................ 7
    Bi to Bn .......................... 8
    Bo to Bq........................... 9
    Bra to Brn ................... 10
    Bro to Bt .................... 11
    Bu to Bz...................... 12
    C
    Caa to Car ................... 13
    Cas to Cg..................... 14
    Ch to Chz................... 15
    Ci to Cn...................... 16
    Coa to Coq.................... 17
    Cor to Cq..................... 18
    Cr to Cz...................... 19
    D
    Da to	Dd ....................... 20
    De to	Dh ....................... 21
    Di to	Dq ....................... 22
    Dr to	Dz ....................... 23
    E
    Ea to El ......................... 24
    Em to Ez ......................... 25
    F
    Fa to Fh.......................... 26
    Fi to Fk ......................... 27
    Fl to Fq ......................... 28
    Fr to Fz ......................... 29
    G
    Ga to Gd ......................... 30
    Ge to Gk ......................... 31
    G1 to Gq ,........................ 32
    Gra to Grh........................ 33
    Gri to Gz......................... 34
    H
    Haa to Hak ........... 35
    Hal to Haw ........... 36
    Har to Hd ............ 37
    Hea to Hem........,... 38
    Hen to Hh ............ 39
    Hi to Hn ............. 40
    Ho to Ht ............. 41
    Hu to Hz ............. 42
    I
    I *to Iz.............. 43
    I
    Ja to Jn.............. 44
    Jo to Jz.............. 45
    K
    Ka to Kd ............. 46
    Ke to Kh ............. 47
    Ki to Km ............. 48
    Kn to Kq ............. 49
    Kr to Kz.............. 50
    L
    La to Ld ............. 51
    Le to Lh.............. 52
    Li to Ln ............. 53
    Lo to Lz.............. 54
    Af
    Maa to Maq............ 55
    Mar to Mb............. 56
    Me A to McF .......... 57
    McG to Md ............ 58
    Mea to Meq............ 59
    Mer to Mh ............ 60
    Mi to Mn ............. 61
    Mo to Mt.............. 62
    Mu to Mz.............. 63
    N
    Na to Nh ............. 64
    Ni to Nz.............. 65
    O
    Oa to Oz ............. 66
    P Pa to Pd............... 67
    Pe to Pg............... 68
    Ph to Pz............... 69
    Q
    Qa to Qz .............. 70
    R Ra to Rd............... 71
    Re to Rh .............. 72
    Ri to Rn .............. 73
    Ro to Rt............... 74
    Ru to Rz............... 75
    5
    Sa to Sch.............. 76
    Scha to Schl .......... 77
    Schm to Scht........... 78
    Schu to Sd ............ 79
    Se to Sg .............. 80
    Sh to Shz ............. 81
    Si to SI .............. 82
    Sm to Sn............... 83
    So to Sq .............. 84
    Sta to Std ............ 85
    Ste to Stn ............ 86
    Sto to Stz ............ 87
    Su to Sz .............. 88
    T Ta to	Tg .............. 89
    Th to	Tn.............. 90
    To to	Tz ............. 91
    U
    Ua to	Uz ............. 92
    V
    Va to	Vz ............. 93
    W
    Wa to Wd............... 94
    Wea to Weh ............ 95
    Wei to Wg.............. 96
    Wh to Wilk............. 97
    Will to Wz............. 98
    XYZ
    XYZ ................... 99
    165
    TM 12-425
    17 Jun 44
    Appendix III
    	PRINCIPAL FOREIGN	LANGUAGES	।
    Arabic	French	Portuguese
    Armenian	Gaelic	Roumanian
    Basque	German	Russian
    Bengali	Greek	Serbian
    Bulgarian	Hindustani	Slovak
    Chinese	Hungarian (Magyar)	Slovenian
    Croatian	Italian	Spanish
    Danish	Japanese	Swedish
    Dutch	Latvian (Lettish)	Syrian
    Egyptian	Lidruanian	Turkish
    Esthonian	Norwegian	Ukranian
    Finnish	Persian	Welsh
    Flemish (Belgian)	Polish	Yiddish
    166
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12-425
    Appendix IV
    SPECIAL SERVICE SCHOOLS AND CODE DESIGNATIONS
    a. Officers.
    Adjutant General’s School .................... 01
    Inspector General’s School.................... 02
    Military Intelligence School ................. 03
    Army Administration School (incl. W.A.C.) .... 04
    Army Exchange School.......................... 05
    Provost Marshal General’s School.............. 06
    Provost Marshal General, Civil Affairs School. 07
    Armored School ............................... 08
    Army Dental School............................ 09
    Army Finance School .......................... 10
    Army Medical School........................... 11
    Army Veterinary School ....................... 12
    Cavalry School ............................... 14
    Chaplains School.............................. 15
    Chemical Warfare School....................... 16
    Coast Artillery School........................ 17
    Engineer School............................... 18
    Field Artillery School........................ 19
    Infantry School .............................. 20
    Medical Field Service School.................. 21
    Ordnance School............................... 22
    Motor Transport School ....................... 23
    Quartermaster School ......................... 24
    School of Military Government................. 25
    Signal Corps School .......................... 26
    Women’s Army Corps Officer Candidate School 27
    School for Special and Morale Services....... 28
    Judge Advocate General’s School............... 29
    Engineer Amphibian Command School............ 30
    Medical Administration School ................ 31
    Transportation Corps School .................. 32
    Tank Destroyer School......................... 33
    Antiaircraft Artillery School................. 34
    Parachute School.............................. 41
    Barrage Balloon School........................ 43
    Other service schools not included above..... 49
    ARMY AIR FORCES SPECIAL SERVICE SCHOOLS
    Pilot School (Primary), includes Contract Pilot School (Primary) ............................. 50
    Pilot School (Basic), includes Contract Pilot School (Basic) ............................... 51
    Pilot School (Advanced Single Eng.), includes Contract Pilot School (advanced) ............. 52
    Pilot School (Advanced 2 Eng.) ............... 53
    Pilot School (Specialized 2 Eng.) ............ 54
    Pilot School (Specialized 4 Eng.) ............ 55
    Pilot School (Liaison Elementary) includes
    Contract Pilot School (Liaison Elementary) 56
    Pilot School (Liaison Advanced), includes Contract Pilot School (Liaison Advanced) ......... 57
    Central Instructor School .................... 60
    Instructor School (Instrument Pilot) ......... 61
    Instructor School (Pilot 4 Eng.) ............. 62
    Instructor School (Bombardier) ............... 63
    Instructor School (Navigator) ................ 64
    Instructor School (Flexible Gunnery) ......... 65
    Instructor School (Fixed Gunnery) ............ 66
    Administration School (AAF) includes OTS
    and OCS .................................... 70
    Aeronautical Engineering (College Course) .... 71
    Applied Tactics School (Tactical School) ..... 72
    Bombardier School ............................ 73
    Flexible Gunnery School....................... 74
    Glider School ................................ 75
    Harvard Business School (Spec. AAF Course) 76
    Medical Service Training School .............. 77
    Navigation School, includes Contract Navigation School ................................... 78
    Radar, Theory of Electronics (College Course) 79
    School of Air Evacuation ..................... 80
    School of Aviation Medicine................... 81
    Staff Course (AAF) ........................... 82
    Statistical Officers’ Course (Includes OTS and
    OCS) ...........„........................... 83
    Technical School (Administrative Inspector) ... 84
    Technical School (Armament) .................. 85
    Technical School (Bombsight Maintenance) ..... 86
    Technical School (Communications) ............ 87
    Technical School (Cryptography) .............. 88
    Technical School (Engineering) ............... 89
    Technical School (Flight Engineering) ........ 90
    Technical School (Link Celestial Navigator and
    Bombardier) ................................ 91
    Technical School	(Meteorology) ............. 92
    Technical School (Photo Lab Commanders or
    Photo Officer Pilot) ....................... 93
    Technical School	(Radio Observer) .......... 94
    Technical School	(Technical Inspector) ..... 95
    167
    TM 12-425
    17 Jun 44
    Technical School (Weight and Balance) ............. 96
    Other AAF Schools not listed above................. 97
    Note. The above code numbers, when applicable , will be used to code attendance at an officer candidate school.
    b. Enlisted.
    Army Air Forces Schools: Airplane mechanics.......................... 01
    Aircraft	armorer ......................... 02
    Aircraft	machinist ....................... 03
    Aircraft	metal worker .................... 04
    Aircraft	welders ......................... 05
    Air Corps technical and supply clerks ..... 06
    Link trainer instructor.................... 07
    Parachute riggers.......................... 08
    Administrative clerks ..................... 09
    Photography .............................. 10
    Radio Operator and mechanic ............... 11
    Teletype................................... 12
    Weather observers.......................... 13
    Advanced courses: Power plants .......................... 14
    Electrical ...................... 15
    Instrument........................ 16
    Propeller ........................ 17
    Weather forecasters............... 18
    Advanced photography.............. 19
    Bombsight maintenance ............ 20
    Power-operated turrets ........... 21
    Army airways communications system ...................... 22
    Arm or Service Schools: Quartermaster Corps............................. 01
    Medical Department......................... 02
    Corps of Engineers......................... 03
    Ordnance Department ....................... 04
    Signal Corps .............................. 05
    Finance Department ........................ 06
    Chemical Warfare Service................... 07
    Field Artillery............................ 08
    Cavalry ................................... 09
    Coast Artillery............................ 10
    Infantry ................................. 11
    Armored Force ...........................   12
    The Adjutant General’s School.............. 13
    Provost Marshal General ................... 14
    Antiaircraft .............................. 15
    Barrage Balloon (antiaircraft command) ... 16
    Parachute (air-borne command) ............. 17
    Tank destroyer............................. 18
    Military Intelligence Service.............. 19
    Women’s Army Corps: Motor transportation....................... 23
    Administrative............................. 24
    Cooks and bakers ........................   25
    168
    17 Jun 44
    TM 12—125
    Appendix V
    MAILING ADDRESSES OF STATE DIRECTORS OF SELECTIVE SERVICE
    State	Street
    Alabama .................... 300 Dexter Ave.............
    Alaska .................................................
    Arizona .................... 1006 Professional Bldg.....
    Arkansas ................... Old State Highway Bldg.....
    California ................. Plaza Bldg.................
    Colorado ................... 300 Logan St...............
    Connecticut ................ 10 North Main St...........
    Delaware.................... 8th and Wollaston Sts......
    Dist. of Columbia........... Weightman School Bldg......
    Florida .................... State Arsenal..............
    Georgia .................... 959 E. Confederate Ave., S.E
    Hawaii ..................... Hotel & Miller Sts.........
    Idaho ...................... State House Annex..........
    Illinois.................... 104 Armory Bldg............
    Indiana ...:................ 711 N. Pennsylvania St.....
    Iowa ....................... National Guard Armory......
    Kansas...................... State House ...............
    Kentucky.................... 334 East Broadway .........
    Louisiana................... Jackson Barracks ..........
    Maine ...................... 31 Western Ave.............
    Maryland.................... Fifth Regiment Armory .....
    Massachusetts .............. 38 Chauncy St..............
    Michigan.......?............ Capitol Savings & Loan Bldg.
    Minnesota .................. 100 East Tenth St..........
    Mississippi ................ War Memorial Bldg..........
    Missouri ................... 310 E. Capitol Ave.........
    Montana .................... State Arsenal Bldg.........
    Nebraska.................... State Capitol .............
    Nevada ..................... State Capitol .............
    New Hampshire .............. 31 South Main St...........
    New Jersey ................. Armory Dr..................
    New Mexico ................. Lensic Bldg................
    New York ................... 76 State St................
    New York City .............. 1 East 44th St.............
    North Carolina ............. Justice Bldg...............
    North Dakota ............... Fraine Barracks ...........
    Ohio ....................... 40 South Third St..........
    Oklahoma ................... Hightower Bldg.............
    Oregon ..................... 412 State Office Bldg......
    Pennsylvania ............... Northwest Office Bldg......
    City Montgomery 4, Ala. Juneau, Alaska Phoenix 3, Ariz. Little Rock, Ark. Sacramento 14, Calif. Denver 9, Colo. West Hartford 7, Conn. Wilmington 99, Del. Washington 7, D. C. St. Augustine, Fla. Atlanta 1, Ga. Honolulu, T. H. Boise, Idaho Springfield, III. Indianapolis 4, Ind. Des Moines, Iowa Topeka, Kansas Louisville 2, Ky. New Orleans 17, La. Augusta, Maine Baltimore 1, Md. Boston 11, Mass. Lansing 4, Mich. St. Paul 2, Minn. Jackson 102, Miss. Jefferson City, Mo. Helena, Mont. Lincoln 9, Nebr. Carson City, Nev. Concord, N. H. Trenton 8, N. J. Santa Fe, N. Mex. Albany 1, N. Y. New York, N. Y. Raleigh, N. C. Bismarck, N. Dak. Columbus 15, Ohio Oklahoma City 2, Okk. Salem, Oregon Harrisburg, Pa.
    169
    TM 12-125
    17 Jun 44
    Puerto Rico...............
    Rhode Island ..............
    South Carolina ............
    South Dakota ..............
    Tennessee .................
    Texas......................
    Utah .....................
    Vermont ...................
    Virginia...................
    Washington ................
    West Virginia..............
    Wisconsin .................
    Wyoming ...................
    Alcazar Apartment Bldg........................
    32 Custom House St............................
    Wade Hampton State Office Bldg................
    National Guard Adm. Bldg......................
    Cumberland Lodge Bldg.........................
    Tribune Bldg..................................
    Utah Oil Bldg.................................
    27 School St..................................
    State Office Bldg.............................
    Camp Murray ..................................
    Capitol Bldg..................................
    122 West Washington Ave.......................
    State Capitol Bldg............................
    San Juan 3, P. R. Providence 3, R. I. Columbia 10, S. C. Rapid City, S. Dak. Nashville 3, Tenn. Austin 17, Texas Salt Lake City 9, Utah Montpelier, Vt. Richmond 19, Va. Ft. Lewis, Wash. Charleston 5, W. Va. Madison 3, Wis. Cheyenne, Wyo.
    ☆ 590902—1944
    170
    NTSU LIBRARY
    iq